OWNER HANDBOOK
This Owner Handbook illustrates the operating instructions of the car.
Alfa Romeo provides a dedicated section available in electronic format for
enthusiasts who want insights, curiosities and detailed information about the features and functions of the car.
ONLINE OWNER HANDBOOK
The
symbol appears in the Owner Handbook next to topics for which updates are available.
Go to elum.alfaromeo.com. website and access your personal area.
The “Maintenance and care” page includes all the information about your vehicle and the link to access eLUM, where you will find all the details of the Owner Handbook.
Alternatively, to access this information, go to the Internet website at http://aftersales.fiat.com/elum/.
The eLUM website is free and conveniently allows you to browse the on-board documents of all other models of the Group, among many other things.
Have a nice read and happy motoring!
Dear Customer,
We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing an Alfa Romeo.
We have written this handbook to help you get to know all the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. This vehicle
is intended for daily use as well as for specific uses. Please take your time to familiarise with all the dynamic features of your car.
Here you will find information, advice and important warnings regarding use of your vehicle and how to achieve the best performance
from the technical features of your Alfa Romeo.
You are advised to read it right through before taking to the road for the first time, to become familiar with the controls and above all
with those concerning brakes, steering and gearbox; at the same time, you can understand the vehicle behaviour on different road
surfaces.
This document also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care and
maintenance of your Alfa Romeo over time.
After reading it, you are advised to keep the handbook inside the vehicle, for an easy reference and for making sure it remains on
board the vehicle should it be sold.
In the attached Warranty Booklet you will also find the description of the Services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers, the
Warranty Certificate and the detail of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity.
We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate your new car and the service provided by the people at Alfa
Romeo.
Enjoy reading. Happy motoring!
IMPORTANT
This Owner Handbook describes all vehicle versions. Optional contents, equipment meant for specific Markets or particular
versions are not identified as such in the text: you need to consider only the information related to the version you own. Any
content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will
be identified with the wording (where provided).
All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. Alfa Romeo S.p.A. aims
at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons.
For further information, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
READ THIS CAREFULLY
REFUELLING
Petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) not less than 95 in compliance with the European specification EN228.
Diesel engines: refuel only with diesel fuel for motor vehicles conforming to the European specification EN590. The use of other products or
mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently invalidate the warranty, due to the damage caused.
Do not use petrol containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage vital
components of the supply system.
For further details on the use of the correct fuel see the "Refuelling the vehicle" paragraph in the "Starting and driving" chapter.
STARTING THE ENGINE
Make sure that the electric parking brake is engaged and that the transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral), press the brake pedal and then press the
ignition device button.
PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL
The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the car on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable
material: fire hazard.
RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the
environment.
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
If, after buying the vehicle, you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring that it maintains its performance and its safety features, its environmental friendliness and
low running costs for a long time to come.
“CYBERSECURITY” DEVICES
The car is equipped with security devices developed according to the technological standards currently applied in the automotive
industry to protect the onboard electronic systems from hacking attempts. The purpose of these security devices is to minimise the
risk of cyber-attacks or the installation of viruses or malware which could compromise the performance of the car and/or allow
stealing of personal data of the buyers and/or users and/or unauthorised dissemination of said information.
The car's purchaser must not remove, modify or tamper with these anti-hacking security devices. The Manufacturer will therefore
not be liable for negative consequences and/or damage to the vehicle and/or to the buyer and/or to third parties deriving from the
removal, modification or alteration of the security devices performed by the car's purchaser and/or user.
USE OF THE OWNER HANDBOOK
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Each time direction instructions (left/right or forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are given, these must be understood as
regarding an occupant in the driver's seat. Special cases not complying with this rule will be specified as appropriate in the text.
The figures in the Owner Handbook are provided by way of example only: this might imply that some details of the image do not
correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. In addition, the Handbook has been conceived considering vehicles with
steering wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible that on vehicles with steering wheel on the right side, the position or
construction of some controls is not exactly mirror-like with respect to the figure.
To identify the chapter with the information needed you can consult the index at the end of this Owner Handbook.
Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A few pages further there is a key for
getting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. There is in any case a textual indication of the current chapter
at the side of each even page.
PRECAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
While reading this Owner Handbook you will find a series of WARNINGS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle.
There are also PRECAUTIONS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, which could
cause accidents or injuries.
Therefore, all WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS must always be followed carefully.
WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols:
personal safety;
vehicle safety;
environmental protection.
NOTE These symbols, when necessary, are indicated besides the title or at the end of the line and are followed by a number. That
number recalls the corresponding warning at the end of the relevant section.
SYMBOLS
Some car components have coloured labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this component. See
below for a brief description of each symbol summarising the contents herein. Always take great care to all warnings herein.
READ THE USER'S
MANUAL
DO NOT TOUCH WITH
HANDS
IT CAN START
AUTOMATICALLY ALSO
WITH ENGINE OFF
PROTECT YOUR EYES
DO NOT OPEN THE CAP
WHEN THE ENGINE IS
HOT
DO NOT OPEN: HIGH
PRESSURE GAS
KEEP CHILDREN AT A
DISTANCE
BURSTING
MOVING PARTS KEEP PARTS
OF YOUR BODY AND
CLOTHES AWAY
DO NOT APPROACH
FLAMES
CORROSIVE LIQUID
HIGH VOLTAGE
VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS
IMPORTANT Any change or alteration of the car might seriously affect its safety and road holding, thus causing accidents, in which
the occupants could even be fatally injured.
This page is intentionally left blank
KNOWING YOUR CAR
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
SAFETY
STARTING AND DRIVING
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND CARE
TECHNICAL DATA
MULTIMEDIA
INDEX
KNOWING YOUR CAR
INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DASHBOARD FOR RIGHT-HAND DRIVE VERSION
THE KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGNITION DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENGINE IMMOBILIZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DOORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEERING WHEEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAR VIEW MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTERNAL LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WINDSCREEN WIPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WINDOW WINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELECTRIC SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BONNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TAILGATE. . . . . . . .
In-depth knowledge of your new vehicle starts here.
The handbook that you are reading simply and directly explains
how it is made and how it works.
That’s why we advise you to read it seated comfortably on board,
so that you can see immediately what is described for you.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.15
.19
.23
.23
.24
.26
.31
.31
.33
.35
.36
.38
.39
KNOWING YOUR CAR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1
03036V0001EM
1. Light switch; 2. Air diffusers; 3. Left stalk; 4. Controls on the steering wheel; 5. Instrument panel; 6. Steering
wheel; 7. Right stalk; 8. Connect; 9. Automatic dual-zone climate control system; 10. Glove compartment; 11. Passenger
side airbag.
10
DASHBOARD FOR RIGHT-HAND DRIVE VERSION
2
03036V0004EM
1. Light switch; 2. Air diffusers; 3. Left stalk; 4. Controls on the steering wheel; 5. Instrument panel; 6. Steering
wheel; 7. Right stalk; 8. Connect; 9. Automatic dual-zone climate control system; 10. Glove compartment; 11. Passenger
side air bag; 12. Bonnet release lever.
11
KNOWING YOUR CAR
THE KEYS
direction indicators (if activated from
Connect system).
button twice to
Rapidly press the
open the tailgate remotely. The direction
indicators will flash twice to indicate that
the tailgate has been opened.
ELECTRONIC KEY
1)
1)
The car is equipped with two electronic
keys with the Keyless Start
fig. 3 function.
Automatic window opening/closing
function
(where provided)
: all
Prolonged pressing of button
windows open.
Prolonged pressing of button
: all
windows closed.
REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL KEYS
If you need a new electronic key, go to an
Alfa Romeo Dealership, taking an ID
document and the car ownership
documents.
3
04016S0010EM
button: unlocking of
Briefly press the
doors and tailgate, timed switching-on of
internal lights and single flashing of
direction indicators (if activated from the
Connect system).
The doors can always be unlocked by
putting the metal insert inside the driver
side door lock.
button: locking of
Briefly press the
doors and tailgate, timed switching-off of
internal lights and double flashing of
12
IMPORTANT
1) The electronic components inside the key
may be damaged if the key is subjected to
strong shocks. In order to ensure complete
efficiency of the electronic devices inside the
key, it should never be exposed to direct
sunlight.
IMPORTANT
1) Used batteries may be harmful to the
environment if not disposed of correctly.
They must be disposed of as specified by law
in the special containers or taken to an Alfa
Romeo Dealership, which will take care of
their disposal.
IGNITION DEVICE
OPERATION
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
To activate the starter switch fig. 4, the
electronic key must be inside the
passenger compartment.
4
04026V0001EM
The ignition device has the following
possible states:
STOP: engine off, steering locked.
Some electrical devices (e.g. central door
locking system, alarm, etc.) are still
available;
ON (single button press): all electrical
devices are available. This state can be
selected by pressing the ignition device
button once, without pressing the brake
pedal;
AVV: engine starting. This state can be
selected by pressing the starter button
once with the brake pedal pressed.
NOTE With the starter switch ON, if
30 minutes pass with P (Park) mode
engaged and the engine stopped, the
starter switch will automatically move to
the STOP position.
NOTE With the engine running, it is
possible to go away from the car taking
the electronic key with you. The engine
will still be running. The vehicle will
indicate the absence of the key on board
when the door is closed.
For more information on the engine
start-up, see the description in the
"Starting the engine" paragraph, in the
"Starting and driving" chapter.
IMPORTANT If the battery was
disconnected, do not start the engine
immediately after reconnecting the
terminals, but press the start button,
without operating the pedals, to turn on
the instrument panel and then start the
engine.
The
symbol on the instrument panel
will remain on, indicating that the
steering must be initialised. To do this,
turn the steering wheel from one end to
the other and bring it back to the centre
position within 30 seconds from starting
the engine. If any red warning lights on
the instrument panel remain lit, stop the
engine, wait for at least 5 seconds and
repeat the starting procedure described
above.
STARTING WITH FLAT KEY BATTERY
If the remote control battery is flat,
proceed as follows to start the vehicle:
lift the front armrest;
lay the key over the profile at the
bottom of the compartment.
STEERING LOCK
(where provided)
Activation
The steering lock is engaged when the
driver door is opened with the ignition
device button at STOP.
Deactivation
The steering lock disengages when the
ignition device is pressed and the
electronic key is recognised.
WARNING
1) Always take the key with you when you
leave your vehicle to prevent someone from
accidentally operating the controls.
Remember to engage the electric parking
brake. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
13
KNOWING YOUR CAR
2) It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any
after-market operation involving steering
system or steering column modifications
(e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that
could adversely affect performance,
invalidate the warranty, cause SERIOUS
SAFETY PROBLEMS and also result in the
car not meeting type-approval
requirements.
3) Before leaving the vehicle, ALWAYS
engage the handbrake. On versions
equipped with automatic transmission,
activate mode P (Park) and press the ignition
device to set it to STOP. When leaving the
vehicle, always lock all the doors by pressing
the button on the handle.
4) For versions equipped with the Keyless
Start system, do not leave the electronic key
inside or near the car or in a place accessible
to children. Do not leave the vehicle with the
ignition device in ON position. A child could
activate the electric window winders, other
controls or even start the vehicle.
5) If the ignition device has been tampered
with (e.g. an attempted theft), have it
checked over by the Alfa Romeo Dealership
before driving again.
14
ENGINE IMMOBILIZER
The Engine Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorised use of the vehicle
preventing to start the engine.
The system does not need to be
enabled/activated: operation is
automatic, regardless of the fact that the
vehicle's doors are locked or unlocked.
When the ignition device is set to ON, the
Engine Immobilizer system identifies the
code transmitted by the key. If the code
is recognised as valid, the Engine
Immobilizer system enables engine
starting.
When the ignition device is brought back
to STOP, the Engine Immobilizer system
deactivates the control unit controlling
the engine, thus preventing its starting.
For the correct engine starting
procedures, see the instructions in the
"Starting the engine" paragraph,
"Starting and driving" chapter.
Irregular operation
If, during starting, the key code is not
icon is
correctly recognised, the
displayed on the instrument panel (see
the instructions in the "Warning lights and
messages" paragraph, "Knowing the
instrument panel" chapter). This
condition leads to the engine switching
off after 2 seconds. In this case, bring the
ignition device to STOP and then to ON; if
it is still blocked, try with the other keys
provided. If it is still not possible to start
the engine, contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
icon is displayed while driving,
If the
this means that the system is running a
self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a voltage drop).
If the display persists, contact an Alfa
Romeo Dealership.
ALARM
DOORS
(where provided)
LOCKING/UNLOCKING DOORS FROM
THE INSIDE
Activation of the alarm triggers the
acoustic warning and the direction
indicators.
IMPORTANT The alarm is adapted to
meet requirements in various countries.
SWITCHING ON THE ALARM
With the doors, bonnet and tailgate
closed and the ignition device turned to
STOP, point the electronic key towards
the vehicle and press and release button
.
Except on some versions for specific
markets, the system produces a visual
and acoustic warning and enables door
locking.
With the alarm on, the warning lights on
the front door handle trims flash fig. 5.
5
04046V0001EM
TURNING THE ALARM OFF
Press the
button.
IMPORTANT The alarm does not switch
off when the central opening is activated
using the metal insert in the key.
Central locking/unlocking
If all doors are closed properly, they will
automatically be locked once the vehicle
has exceeded approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) ("Auto relock" function active).
button on the driver side,
Press the
passenger side or rear (where provided)
door panel trims fig. 6 to lock the doors.
With doors locked, press the
button
on the front door panel trims to unlock
them.
DISABLING THE ALARM
To completely disable the alarm (e.g.
during a long period of car inactivity), lock
the doors by turning the metal insert,
found inside the electronic key, in the
door lock.
6
04056V0001EM
15
KNOWING YOUR CAR
LOCKING/UNLOCKING DOORS FROM
THE OUTSIDE
Locking from the outside
With the doors closed, press the
button on the key.
In any case, the doors can be locked with
all the doors closed and the tailgate open.
on the key is
When the button
pressed, all the locks are closed, including
that of the open tailgate. The latter will
be locked when it is closed.
2)
Door unlocking from the outside
on the key.
Press button
the handle of the driver's door unlocks
the driver's door only, or all the doors,
depending on the mode set in the
Connect system.
The car doors and tailgate can be locked
button on
in any case by pressing the
the electronic key or on the car’s inner
door panel.
Door locking
To lock the doors, proceed as follows:
make sure that you have the
electronic key and are close to the driver
or passenger side door handle;
press the "door lock" button fig. 7 on
the handle: this will lock all the doors and
the tailgate. Door locking will activate the
alarm as well (where provided).
Driver side door emergency opening
If the electronic key does not work, e.g.
because its battery is flat or the vehicle
battery is flat, the emergency metal
insert inside the key can anyway be used
to operate the lock, unlocking the driver
side door.
To extract the metal insert, proceed as
follows:
Pressing in the points indicated in
fig. 8 extract the cover pulling
downwards;
remove the key insert from its housing
fig. 9;
insert the metal insert in the driver
side door lock and turn it to unlock the
door.
PASSIVE ENTRY
(where provided)
3)
The Passive Entry system can identify
the presence of an electronic key near
the doors and the tailgate.
The system enables the doors (or the
tailgate) to be locked/unlocked without
pressing any buttons on the electronic
key.
The key is detected only after the system
recognizes the presence of a hand in one
of the front handles. If the detected key
is valid, the doors and the tailgate are
unlocked (the elements that open depend
on the Connect system settings).
Where the function is provided, grasping
16
7
04056S0003EM
IMPORTANT After pressing the "door
locking" button, you need to wait two
seconds before the doors can be
unlocked again using the door handle. It is
therefore possible to check whether the
vehicle is locked correctly by pulling the
door handle within 2 seconds. The doors
will not be unlocked again.
8
04016S0002EM
POWER LOCK
(where provided)
6)
9
04016S0003EM
Do not simultaneously push the
lock/unlock door button fig. 7 and pull the
handle, (see fig. 10 ).
10
04056S0004EM
This safety device inhibits the operation
of the interior door handles and the door
locking/unlocking button.
It thereby prevents the opening of the
doors from inside the passenger
compartment, serving as an obstacle to
break-in attempts (e.g. broken window).
We recommend that you activate the
device each time you park your vehicle.
Activating the device
The device is enabled on all the doors by
button on the key twice
pressing the
quickly.
The direction indicators flash 3 times to
let you know that the device is active.
If one or more of the doors are not closed
correctly, the device will not activate,
thus preventing a person from getting
stuck inside the passenger compartment
by entering the vehicle through, and then
closing, the open door.
Deactivating the device
The device disengages automatically:
when the doors are unlocked (pressing
on the key with remote
button
control);
when the ignition device is set to ON.
CHILD SAFETY DEVICE
7) 8)
This system prevents the rear doors from
being opened from the inside.
This device fig. 11 can be engaged only
with the doors open:
11
04056S0007EM
position
: device engaged (door
locked);
position
: device not engaged (door
may be opened from the inside).
The device remains engaged even if the
doors are electrically unlocked.
IMPORTANT The rear doors cannot be
opened from the inside when the child
safety device is engaged.
17
KNOWING YOUR CAR
UNLOCKING THE DOORS WITH A FLAT
BATTERY
Proceed as follows to unlock the doors if
the car battery is flat.
Rear doors and passenger door
Proceed as follows:
insert the metal insert of the
electronic key in the release device
housing fig. 12;
press the
button on the electronic
key;
press the
button on the door panel;
open by inserting the key insert in the
driver's door lock;
operate the internal door handle.
IMPORTANT For the rear doors, if the
child lock device was engaged and the
previously described locking procedure
carried out, operating the internal handle
will not open the door but will only realign
the lock release device. To open the door,
the outside handle must be used. The
door central locking/unlocking buttons
are not deactivated when the emergency
lock is engaged.
WARNING
12
04056S0008EM
turn the key clockwise for the right
door locks or anticlockwise for the left
door locks;
remove the key from the housing.
Proceed in one of the following ways to
realign the door lock device (only when
the battery charge has been restored):
18
6) Once the Power Lock system is engaged,
it is impossible to open the doors from inside
the vehicle. Before getting out of the car,
please therefore check that there is no-one
left inside.
7) NEVER leave children unattended inside
the car, let alone leave the car with the doors
unlocked in a place that children can access
easily. Children may seriously, or even
fatally, injure themselves. Also ensure that
children do not inadvertently operate the
electric parking brake, the brake pedal or the
transmission lever.
8) Always use this device when carrying
children. After engaging the child lock on
both rear doors, check for effective
engagement by trying to open a door with
the internal handle.
IMPORTANT
2) Make sure to take the key with you once a
door or the tailgate is locked, to prevent
locking the same key inside the vehicle. If the
key has been locked in, it can only be
recovered using the second provided key.
3) The operation of the recognition system
depends on various factors, such as, for
example, any electromagnetic wave
interference from external sources (e.g.
mobile phones), the charge of the battery in
the electronic key and the presence of metal
objects near the key or the car. In these
cases it is still possible to unlock the doors
by using the metal insert in the electronic key
(see description on the following pages).
SEATS
IMPORTANT Carry out the adjustment
while sitting on the seat involved (driver
side or passenger side).
FRONT SEATS WITH MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT
Backrest angle adjustment
Move lever 3 fig. 13 to adjust the
backrest angle, accompanying it with the
movement of the torso (operate the lever
until the desired position is reached, then
release it).
9)
4)
Longitudinal adjustment
10)
Lift lever 1 fig. 13 and push the seat
forwards or backwards.
Folding the backrest forward
(where provided)
The front passenger seat can be folded
forward by operating lever 3 fig. 13.
During this operation, accompany the
backrest down with your free hand.
Folding the backrest down further
increases the size of the load
compartment.
"SPARCO" SPORT CARBONSHELL
SEATS
(where provided)
13
04066V0001EM
IMPORTANT Carry out the adjustment
while sitting on the seat involved (driver
side or passenger side).
Longitudinal adjustment
Lift lever 1 fig. 14 and push the seat
forwards or backwards.
14
04066S0002EM
IMPORTANT Carry out the adjustment
while sitting on the seat involved (driver
side or passenger side).
Height adjustment
(electric)
Move button 2 fig. 14 upwards or
downwards to obtain the required height.
Backrest angle adjustment
Move lever 3 fig. 14 to adjust the
backrest angle, accompanying it with the
movement of the torso (operate the lever
until the desired position is reached, then
release it).
Height adjustment
Adjust lever 2 fig. 13 upwards or
downwards to obtain the required height.
19
KNOWING YOUR CAR
ELECTRICALLY ADJUSTABLE FRONT
SEATS
5)
NOTE The conformation of the seats may
vary according to the versions.
The buttons for electrical seat
adjustment are on the outer side of the
seat, near the floor.
These buttons can be used to adjust the
height, the lengthwise position in relation
to the vehicle and the angle of the
backrest.
15
04066V0003EM
Height adjustment
Use the rear part of switch 1 fig. 15 to
modify the height and/or the angle of the
seat cushion.
Longitudinal adjustment
Push switch 1 forwards or backwards to
move the seat in the corresponding
direction.
20
Backrest angle adjustment
Push switch 2 fig. 15 forwards or
backwards to adjust the backrest in the
corresponding direction.
Electric lumbar adjustment
Use the joystick 3 fig. 15 to actuate the
lumbar area device until getting top
comfort while driving.
Press the following parts of the joystick:
top: inflates the cushion;
bottom: deflates the cushion;
front: inflates the upper part of the
cushion;
rear: inflates the lower part of the
cushion.
IMPORTANT The electrical adjustment is
only allowed when the ignition device is
turned to ON and for about 2 minutes
after it is turned to STOP. The seat can
also be moved after opening/closing the
door for about 2 minutes; car
locking/unlocking or switching on of the
centre front ceiling light.
Seat angle adjustment (tilting)
(where provided)
The seat angle can be set to four
positions. Lift or push the front part of
control 1 to move the front part of the
seat in the corresponding direction.
Release control 1 when the seat has
reached the desired position.
Backrest width adjustment
(where provided)
Push the switches 4 fig. 15 to regulate
the width of the backrest through the
lateral paddings.
Storing the driver’s seat positions
Buttons 5 fig. 16 allow you to store and
recall three different driver’s seat
positions.
You can store and recall for 20 minutes
with the starter switch in the STOP
position or with the starter switch in the
ON position, the engine running and the
vehicle moving. The performed position
memorisation is confirmed by an acoustic
warning.
16
04066V0015EM
To memorise a seat position, adjust it
with the various controls, then press the
button where you want to memorise the
position for 1.5 seconds. When a new
seat position is memorised, the
previously memorised position on the
same button is automatically
overwritten.
Recalling a memorised position is also
possible for about 3 minutes after the
doors are opened and about 1 minute
after the engine is stopped. To recall a
memorised position, press the relevant
button briefly.
EASY ENTRY FUNCTION
The Easy Entry function is designed to
retract the driver side seat automatically
by 2.36 in (60 mm) to make it easier for
the driver to get in and out of the car.
The movement is activated only if the
seat is set to a driving position which is in
front of the B pillar of the car.
The function is associated with
electrically adjustable front seats for
each of the three stored positions.
The Easy Entry function can be
activated/deactivated using the Connect
system.
Activating entrance mode
With the door open and the starter device
at STOP, the driver side seat will be in a
position retracted by 2.36 in (60 mm)
with respect to the driving position set by
the user.
When the door is closed and the starter
device is in the ON position, the seat will
automatically return to the set driving
position.
NOTE If the seat is moved manually while
it is still in retracted position, it will
remain in the new set position when the
car is entered again.
Activating exit mode
In order to help the driver get out of the
car, the driver side seat will move back by
2.36 in (60 mm) when the starter device
is in STOP mode and the driver side door
is opened.
NOTE Pressing any button on the seat
memory or control panel will immediately
interrupt the automatic positioning
function (antipanic function). The
operation must be repeated to complete
the function.
REAR SEATS
11)
The rear seats allow for:
three passengers.
17
04066V0005EM
SPLIT FOLDING REAR SEAT
Partial extension of the luggage
compartment (1/3 or 2/3)
6)
Extending the right side of the luggage
compartment (1/3 of the rear seat)
allows you to carry two passengers on
the left part of the rear seat, while
extending the left side (2/3 of the rear
seat) allows you to carry one passenger.
Proceed as follows:
completely lower the rear seat head
restraints;
place the seat belt so that it doesn't
impede the movement of the backrest
while tilting it;
operate the left-hand lever 1
fig. 18 (inside the luggage compartment)
to fold down the left side, or the mirror
image right-hand lever to fold down the
right side of the backrest. It will fold
21
KNOWING YOUR CAR
forwards automatically. If necessary,
accompany the backrest during the initial
stage of tilting.
Repositioning the backrests
IMPORTANT
12)
Move the seatbelts to the side, making
sure that they are correctly extended and
not twisted and that they are not trapped
behind the backrests of the seats, then
lift the backrests pushing them back until
you hear the locking click on both
attachment mechanisms.
WARNING
18
04066V0009EM
It is also possible to disengage sections
of the rear seat from inside the luggage
compartment using one of the two levers
located under the rear seat fig. 19. Each
lever folds down the section of the
backrest on the same side.
19
22
04066V0007EM
9) All adjustments must be made with the
car stationary.
10) Once you have released the adjustment
lever, always check that the seat is locked on
the guides by trying to move it back and
forth. If the seat is not locked into place, it
may unexpectedly slide and cause the driver
to lose control of the car.
11) Always make sure that all those on
board the car are seated and are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
12) Make sure the backrests are properly
secured at both sides to prevent them from
moving forward, in the event of sharp
braking, with possible impact with of the
passengers.
4) The fabric upholstery of the seats has
been designed to withstand long-term wear
deriving from normal use of the car. Some
precautions are however required. Avoid
prolonged and/or excessive rubbing against
clothing accessories such as metal buckles
and Velcro strips which, by applying a high
pressure on the fabric in a small area, could
cause it to break, thereby damaging the
upholstery.
5) Do not place any kind of items under the
electrically adjusted seats as they could
impede their movement or otherwise
damage the controls.
6) Before tilting the backrest, remove any
objects on the seat cushion.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
STEERING WHEEL
14) 15)
ADJUSTMENTS
ADJUSTMENTS
The steering wheel can be adjusted both
in height and in depth.
13)
Upward adjustment: raise the head
restraint until it clicks into place.
Downward adjustment: press button 1
fig. 20 and lower the head restraint.
21
04076V0002EM
WARNING
20
04076V0001EM
13) Head restraints must be adjusted so
that the head, rather than the neck, rests on
them. Only in this case they can protect your
head correctly. Any removed head restraints
must be repositioned correctly, in order to
protect the occupants in the event of impact:
follow the instructions above.
HEAD RESTRAINTS (removal)
Proceed as follows to remove the head
restraints:
raise the head restraints to their
maximum height;
press button 1 to lift the head
restraint, then press device 2 fig. 19 (front
head restraint) or 1 and 2 fig. 21 (rear
head restraint) to remove it.
22
04086V0001EM
23
KNOWING YOUR CAR
To adjust the position bring the lever 1
fig. 22 down to position A, after which the
steering wheel can be adjusted to the
most suitable position and subsequently
locked in this position by bringing lever
1 to position B again.
ELECTRIC STEERING WHEEL HEATING
(where provided)
With ignition device at ON, press the
fig. 23 button on the air conditioner
control panel.
REAR VIEW MIRRORS
WARNING
INTERIOR MIRROR
14) All adjustments must be carried out only
with the car stationary and engine stopped.
15) It is absolutely forbidden to carry out
any after-market operation involving
steering system or steering column
modifications (e.g. installation of anti-theft
device) that could adversely affect
performance, invalidate the warranty, cause
SERIOUS SAFETY PROBLEMS and also
result in the car not meeting type-approval
requirements.
Operate lever fig. 24 to adjust the mirror
into two different positions: normal or
anti-glare.
24
23
04086V0002EM
When the function is enabled, the LED on
the button switches on.
IMPORTANT If this function is activated
with the engine stopped the battery may
run down.
24
04106S0001EM
The mirror is fitted with a safety device
that causes its release in the event of a
violent impact with the passenger.
ELECTROCHROMIC INTERIOR MIRROR
(where provided)
On some versions, an electrochromic
mirror is available, that can automatically
modify its reflecting action to prevent
dazzling the driver fig. 25.
The electrochromic mirror has an
ON/OFF button to activate/deactivate
the electrochromic anti-glaring function.
DOOR MIRRORS
16)
Electric adjustment
The mirrors can only be adjusted with the
ignition device at ON.
Select the desired mirror using device 1
fig. 26:
device in position A: left mirror
selected;
device in position B: right mirror
selected.
Manual folding
To fold the mirrors, move them from the
open position to the closed position
fig. 27.
27
25
04106S0002EM
26
04106V0004EM
To adjust the selected mirror, use device
1 in the four directions.
IMPORTANT Once adjustment is
complete, rotate device 1 to position D
to prevent accidental movements.
04106V0005EM
Electric folding
(where provided)
With device 1 in position D, move it to
position C fig. 26. Turn the device 1 again
to position C to return the mirrors to the
driving position.
NOTE In case of involuntary movement of
the mirrors (following a crash) beyond the
normal operating position, the system
will activated an auxiliary realignment
cycle when the first opening/closing
command is imparted. The mirror will
therefore return to the overtravel
position which was reached by accident,
will fold and then open to the correct
position.
If device 1 is turned again during door
25
KNOWING YOUR CAR
mirror folding (from closed to open
position and vice versa), their movement
direction is reversed.
Automatic activation
Activating the central door locking
system from outside the car
automatically folds the mirrors, they
return to the driving position when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
If the external mirrors were folded
operating on the device 1, they could be
returned to the driving position only
operating a new control on the device.
Activation/deactivation of the function
The electric mirror folding function can
be activated/deactivated using the
Connect system menu (the default
setting of the function is “Off”).
Alternatively, you can choose to
open/close the mirrors automatically
when opening/closing the doors (using
the electronic key or the Passive Entry
system, where provided).
IMPORTANT The mirrors must always be
open while driving and should never be
folded.
26
ELECTROCHROMIC EXTERIOR
MIRRORS
(where provided)
As well as an inside mirror, an
electrochromic mirror is also available on
some versions, which automatically
modifies its reflecting properties to
prevent dazzling the driver. The
anti-glare electrochromic enable/disable
button fig. 25 is the same for all rear view
mirrors.
EXTERNAL LIGHTS
LIGHT SWITCH
The light switch fig. 28, located on the
left side (left hand drive versions) or on
the right side (right hand drive versions)
of the dashboard, controls operation of
headlights, side lights, daytime running
lights, dipped beam headlights, front and
rear fog lights.
WARNING
16) As door mirrors are curved, and
therefore they may slightly alter the
perception of distance.
28
04126V0005EM
The external lights can be activated only
when the ignition device is in position ON,
except for the parking lights. See the
"Parking lights" paragraph, in this chapter
for more information.
The instrument panel and the various
controls on the dashboard will be lit up
when the exterior lights are switched on.
AUTO FUNCTION (Dusk sensor)
This is implemented by an infrared LED
sensor on the windscreen that works in
conjunction with the rain sensor. It is able
to detect variations in the outside light
level based on the light sensitivity set
through the Connect system.
The dusk sensor sensitivity can be
adjusted according to 3 levels: level
1=minimum sensitivity, level 2=average
sensitivity, level 3=maximum sensitivity.
The higher the sensitivity set, the lesser
is the external light variation needed to
switch the lights on (e.g. with a setting on
level 3 at sunset the headlights come on
earlier than levels 1 and 2).
Function activation
Turn the light switch to the
position.
IMPORTANT The function can only be
activated with the ignition device at ON.
Function deactivation
To deactivate the function, turn the light
.
switch to a position other than
DIPPED HEADLIGHTS
Turn the light switch to
to switch on
the side lights, the lights on the
instrument panel and the dipped beam
headlights.
warning light switches on in the
The
instrument panel.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) AND
SIDE LIGHTS (Daytime Running Lights)
(where provided)
17) 18)
With the ignition device turned to ON and
the
the light switch turned to position
daytime running lights are automatically
activated; the other lights and interior
lighting remain off.
Where provided, when the direction
indicators are activated, the
corresponding DRL will be dimmed (on
35W Bi-Xenon Headlamps, the DRL will
be turned off), until the direction
indicators are deactivated.
Where provided, the DRL can be
activated/deactivated from Connect
system, by selecting the following
functions in sequence on the main MENU:
"Settings", "Lights" and "Daytime Running
Lights".
IMPORTANT For markets where DRL use
is not required, these lights work as side
lights and they are switched on and off
jointly with the main beam headlights.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS
(where provided)
The fog light switch is integrated with the
light switch.
Press the
button to turn on the fog
lights with side lights and dipped beam
headlights on.
To turn off the fog lights, press the
button again or turn the switch to the
position.
The fog lights are switched on with the
dipped beam headlights or DRL on (the
latter work as side lights) and are
switched on when switching on the main
beam headlights but not when the main
beam headlights are flashed only.
If the fog lights are not switched off
before stopping the engine, the next time
the engine is started they will switch on
again.
Cornering lights
(where provided)
The fog lights perform cornering
function. This function allows to
illuminate the road or a corner better by
lighting the corresponding fog light.
The cornering function can be
deactivated on the Connect system by
selecting the following functions in
sequence on the main menu: "Settings",
"Lights" and "Cornering Lights".
REAR FOG LIGHT
The rear fog light switch is integrated
with the light switch.
Press the
button to switch the light
on/off.
The rear fog light switches on only when
the dipped beam headlights or fog lights
27
KNOWING YOUR CAR
are switched on. The light can be
button
switched off by pressing the
again or by switching off the dipped
beam headlights.
When the engine is stopped with the rear
fog lights on, the next time the engine is
started the lights will, however, be off.
Connect system by selecting the
following functions from the main menu
in sequence: "Settings", "Lights" and
"Follow me"; the side lights and the
dipped beam headlights stay on for a
time that can be set between 30, 60 and
90 seconds.
PARKING LIGHTS
They are switched on if, within a few
seconds from stopping the engine, the
position
light switch is put first in the
position. All side lights
and then the
switch on, if you want to leave only those
on one side (right/left) switched on, you
need to move the direction indicators
control on the position on the side you
wish to leave on.
When a front door is opened with the
, a tone will be
light switch in position
heard to inform the driver that the
parking lights are on.
warning light switches on in the
The
instrument panel.
Function activation
With the headlights on, take the ignition
device to the STOP position: the timer
starts when the light switch is turned to
position.
the
IMPORTANT Turning the ignition switch
to ON turns off the parking lights, which
were on only on one side.
HEADLIGHTS OFF TIMER
The "Follow Me" function delays the
switching off of the headlights after the
car has been stopped.
The function can be enabled from the
28
account the speed of the car, the
bend/corner angle and the speed of
steering.
MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS
To activate the fixed main beam
headlights push the left lever towards
the instrument panel fig. 29. The light
or
.
switch must be turned to
With main beam headlights on, the
warning light/icon on the instrument
panel will come on at the same time.
IMPORTANT To activate this function the
headlights must be deactivated within
2 minutes after the ignition device has
been taken to STOP.
Function deactivation
This function is deactivated by switching
on the headlights, the side lights or
bringing the ignition device to ON.
AFS FUNCTION (Adaptive Frontlight
System)
(where provided)
This is a system combined with Xenon
headlights (Bi-Xenon Headlamps 35W
version) which directs the main light
beam, horizontally and vertically, and
continuously and automatically adapts it
to the driving conditions round
bends/when cornering.
The system directs the light beam to light
up the road in the best way, taking into
29
04126S0020EM
The main beam headlights are switched
off by pushing the left stalk forward
switches off
again. Warning light/icon
in the instrument panel.
Flashing the headlights
The flashing of the main beam headlights
is activated by pulling the left stalk
towards the steering wheel, the lights
remain on while you are operating the
lever.
Automatic high beam (AHB system)
headlights
(where provided)
The AHB system is used to switch the
high beam headlights on and off
automatically and to adapt the lighting
near towns.
Function enabling
This function is enabled in the Connect
system by selecting “Settings”, “Lights”
fig. 30 and then “Automatic High Beam”
and with the light switch turned to
.
position
30
11126S0009EM
Function activation
The first time the high beam headlights
are activated (pushing the left lever), the
function is activated (the warning light
or the
symbol comes on in the
instrument panel).
If the high beam headlights are actually
will
on, the blue icon/warning light
also come on in the instrument panel.
The function activates the high beam
headlights when the speed is higher than
37 mph (60 km/h).
When the speed is lower than 15 mph
(25 km/h) and the function is active, the
function switches the main beam
headlights off.
If the fixed main beam headlights are
operated quickly again (pushing the left
stalk towards the instrument panel), the
will switch on in the
warning light/icon
instrument panel and the main beam
headlights will be switched on constantly
until the speed exceeds 37 mph
(60 km/h).
Function deactivation
To deactivate the automatic function
rotate the light switch ring nut to position
.
IMPORTANT NOTES
The correct operation of the automatic
high beam function may be influenced by:
presence of reflections on road sign
surfaces;
dim light of other road users (e.g.
cyclists or pedestrians);
bad weather (rain or fog);
presence of dirt on the sensor or
obstruction of the sensor;
damage to the windscreen or presence
of dirt or ice/snow or misting up of the
windscreen;
presence of vehicles approaching in
the opposite direction partially obscured
by a central obstacle.
IMPORTANT Make sure that the
windscreen is always defrosted and
demisted in winter.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
Move the left stalk fig. 29 to the end of
its travel (unstable position):
up: right direction signal activated, the
flashes on the
warning light
instrument panel;
down: left direction signal activated,
flashes on the
the warning light
instrument panel.
The direction indicators are switched off
automatically when the steering wheel is
straightened.
"Lane Change" function
When you want to signal a lane change,
move the lever until the first impulse
(about half stroke).
The direction indicator on the selected
side flashes three times and then
switches off automatically.
29
KNOWING YOUR CAR
HEADLIGHT ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENT
Headlight alignment corrector
(where provided)
This device is not available on vehicles
equipped with Xenon headlights
(Bi-Xenon Headlamps 35W version), as
they require an automatic alignment
correction system.
It only operates with the ignition device
at ON.
31
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROL
BUTTON GRAPHIC BRIGHTNESS
ADJUSTMENT
With side lights or headlights on, turn the
ring fig. 32 upwards to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel and
control button graphics lighting, or turn
the ring downwards to decrease it. The
control operates with pulses, so ever
time it is activated, the brightness
increases/decreases by one level, up to a
maximum of seven.
04126V0015EM
To adjust it, rotate the ring fig. 31.
Position 0: one or two people on the
front seats;
Position 1: 4 or 5 passengers;
Position 2: 4 or 5 passengers + load in
the luggage compartment
Position 3: driver + maximum
admissible load stowed only in the
luggage compartment
30
IMPORTANT Check the headlight
alignment each time the weight of the
load transported changes.
32
04126V0016EM
WARNING
17) The daytime running lights are an
alternative to the dipped headlights for
driving during the daytime in countries
where it is compulsory to have lights on
during the day; where it is not compulsory,
the use of daytime running lights is
permitted.
18) Daytime running lights cannot replace
dipped beam headlights when driving at
night or through tunnels. The use of daytime
running lights is governed by the highway
code of the country in which you are driving.
Comply with legal requirements.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
WINDSCREEN WIPER
FRONT CEILING LIGHT
SCREEN WIPER/WASHER
Switch 1 fig. 33 switches on/off the
light 8.
Switch 2 is used to switch the rear
ceiling lights on/off.
Switch 3 switches on/off all light
inside the ceiling lights (front and rear) in
the passenger's compartment.
Switch 4 activates or deactivates the
ceiling light 6, 7, 8 switching on/off upon
opening/closing the doors. Lights switch
on/off progressively.
Switch 5 switches on/off light 6.
33
04136S0001EM
7) 8)
This operates only with the ignition
device at ON.
The ring fig. 34 can be set to the
following positions:
windscreen wiper off.
rotating the ring nut to the first
position activates the first
sensitivity level of the rain sensor.
rotating the ring nut to the second
position activates the second
sensitivity level of the rain sensor.
rotating the ring nut to the third
position activates the first
continuous speed level of the
windscreen wipers in manual mode.
rotating the ring nut to the fourth
position activates the second
continuous speed level of the
windscreen wipers in manual mode.
34
04146V0001EM
Move the stalk upwards (it only has
unstable positions) to activate the MIST
function. It only operates while the stalk
is held in this position. When released, the
stalk will return to its default position
and the windscreen wiper will be
automatically stopped. This function is
useful to remove small deposits of dust
from the windscreen, or morning dew.
IMPORTANT This function does not
activate the windscreen washer;
windscreen washer fluid will not
therefore be sprayed onto the
windscreen. To spray windscreen washer
fluid onto the windscreen, the washing
function must be used.
or
, the
With ring nut in position
windscreen wiper will automatically
adapt its operating speed to the speed of
the vehicle.
31
KNOWING YOUR CAR
“Smart washing” function
Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel
(unstable position) to activate a washing
cycle.
Hold the stalk pulled to activate both the
windscreen washer jet and the
windscreen wiper with a single
movement, until the stalk is released.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
Engaging reverse gear with the
windscreen wiper operating activates a
single cycle of the rear window wiper.
Moving the stalk fig. 34 (it only has
unstable positions):
!"#$%&’ !() *+’!%,-)+! .$+)/
,)*9:,*(1 *0( -(,- 892438 8,10(+, &-9(> ;510 ,)*9:,*(1 32( 8,10927
)=)<(@ ?((;927 *0( 1*, ;510(4 8,10(1
)32*925351<= 52*9< *0( 1*, 91 -(<(,1(4.O
&"#+#$%&’ +89*0 -(:(-1( 7(,(27,7(4. *091 ,)*9:,*(1Q4(,)*9:,*(1 *0(
*/0+,05/56 3;(-,*932 3> *0( -(,- 892438
89;(-@ -(7,-4<(11 3> *0( 63:(6(2* 3> *0(
89241)-((2 89;(-O
&"#+#$%&’ +89*0 -(:(-1( 7(,- 0/+
(27,7(4. *091 ,)*9:,*(1Q4(,)*9:,*(1
,0+478,++40+ 3;(-,*932 +89*0 ,)*5,*927
>-(D5(2)= 3> ,&35* R 1()3241. 3> *0(
-(,- 892438 89;(-@ -(7,-4<(11 3> *0(
63:(6(2* 3> *0( 89241)-((2 89;(-B
32
RAIN SENSOR
This is located behind the interior rear
view mirror, in contact with the
windscreen and can detect the presence
of rain and, consequently, manage the
cleaning of the windscreen in accordance
with the amount of water on the screen.
Activation/deactivation
9) 10)
Rotating the ring nut fig. 34 to position
or
activates the rain sensor.
The activation of the sensor is signalled
by a flick of the wiper (indicating that the
command has been acquired).
Use the ring fig. 34 or turn the ignition
device to STOP to turn off the system.
19)
WARNING
19) Make sure the device is switched off
whenever the windscreen must be cleaned.
IMPORTANT
7) Never use the windscreen wipers to
remove layers of snow or ice from the
windscreen. In such conditions, the
windscreen wiper may be subjected to
excessive stress and the motor cut-out
switch, which prevents operation for a few
seconds, may intervene. If operation is not
subsequently restored, even after restarting
the engine, contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
8) Do not operate the windscreen wiper with
the blades lifted from the windscreen.
9) Do not activate the rain sensor when
washing the car in an automatic car wash.
10) Make sure the device is switched off if
there is ice on the windscreen.
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
AUTOMATIC DUAL-ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
2)
Controls
35
04156V0005EM
1. Driver side temperature adjustment knob; 2. Driver side AUTO function activation button (automatic operation); 3. Driver's
side air distribution selection button; 4. MAX-DEF function activation button (rapid defrosting/demisting); 5. Fan speed
adjustment knob; 6. Heated rear window on/off button; 7. Passenger side air distribution selection button; 8. Passenger side
AUTO function activation button (automatic operation); 9. Passenger side temperature adjustment knob; 10. Driver/passenger
SYNC function activation button (alignment of set temperatures); 11. Passenger side seat heater activation button; (where
provided, see chapter on seats); 12. Climate control compressor on/off button; 13. Steering wheel heater activation button;
(where provided, see chapter on steering wheel); 14. Driver side seat heater activation button; (where provided, see chapter on
"Seats"); 15. Internal air recirculation and automatic operation on/off button.
33
KNOWING YOUR CAR
Air flow to the windscreen and front
side window vents to
demist/defrost them.
Air flow at central and side
dashboard vents to ventilate the
chest and the face during the hot
season.
Air flow to the front and rear
footwell vents. This air distribution
setting heats the passenger
compartment most quickly, giving a
prompt sensation of warmth.
Air flow distributed between
footwell vents (hotter air) and
central and side dashboard vents
(cooler air). This air distribution
setting is useful in spring and
autumn on sunny days.
Air flow distributed between
footwell vents and windscreen and
front side window defrosting/
demisting vents. This distribution
setting allows the passenger
compartment to be warmed
effectively and prevents the
windows from misting.
Air flow distribution between
windscreen demisting/defrosting
vents and side and central
dashboard vents. This allows air to
be sent to the windscreen in
conditions of strong sunlight.
Air flow distribution to all diffusers
on the vehicle.
In AUTO mode, the air conditioner
automatically manages the air
distribution. When set manually, the air
distribution is indicated by the respective
symbols on the Connect system display
switching on.
START & STOP EVO
The automatic dual zone climate control
system manages the Start&Stop Evo
(engine off when the vehicle speed is
0 mph (0 km/h) to ensure adequate
comfort inside the vehicle.
34
In particular, the climate control system
turns off the Stop & Start Evo if:
the climate control system is in AUTO
mode (LED on the button switched on)
and the temperature conditions inside
the car are far from a comfort
temperature;
the climate control system is in LO
maximum cooling;
the climate control system is in HI
maximum heating;
the climate control system is in the
MAX-DEF status.
With Stop & Start Evo on (engine off and
vehicle speed equal to 0 mph (0 km/h)),
the flow is reduced as much as possible,
to maintain the passenger compartment
comfort conditions for longer.
IMPORTANT
2) The system uses R1234yf coolant gas,
which does not pollute the environment in the
event of accidental leakage. Under no
circumstances use R134a and R12 fluids,
which are incompatible with the components
of the system.
WINDOW WINDERS
ELECTRIC WINDOWS
20)
They work with the ignition device in the
ON position and for about 3 minutes
after the ignition device has been turned
to the STOP position. When one of the
front doors is opened this operation is
disabled.
Driver side front door controls
The buttons are located on the door
panel trim. All windows can be controlled
from the driver side door panel fig. 36.
36
04166V0001EM
2: front right window opening/closing.
"Continuous automatic" operation during
window opening/closing stage and
anti-pinch system activated.
3: rear right window opening/closing.
"Continuous automatic" operation during
window opening/closing stage and
anti-pinch system activated.
4: enabling/disabling of rear door
electric window controls;
5: rear left window opening/closing.
"Automatic continuous" operation during
window opening/closing and anti-pinch
system activated.
Window opening
Push the buttons to open the desired
window.
Each button has two position steps.
Press gently (first position step) for
manual "burst" window travel, while
pressing the same button harder (second
position step) activates "continuous
automatic" operation.
If the button is pressed again, the window
will stop in the desired position.
Window closing
Lift the buttons to close the desired
window.
The window closing stage occurs
following the same logic described for
the opening stage both of the front door
windows and the rear door windows.
Window anti-pinch safety device
This safety system can recognise the
presence of any obstacle during the
window closing movement. If this occurs,
the system stops the window's
movement and reverts it, depending on
its position.
The anti-pinch safety function is
activated both during the manual and the
automatic operation of the window.
Electric window system initialisation
If power supply is interrupted, the
electric window automatic operation
must be reinitialised.
To perform the initialization procedure,
which must be done on each door with the
doors closed, manually fully close the
window to be initialized.
1: front left window opening/closing.
"Continuous automatic" operation during
window opening/closing stage and
anti-pinch system activated.
35
KNOWING YOUR CAR
ELECTRIC SUNROOF
WARNING
(where provided)
21)
20) Incorrect use of the electric windows
may be dangerous. Before and during
operation, always check that nobody is
exposed to the risk of being injured either
directly by the moving window or through
objects getting caught or hit by it.
The electric sunroof comprises two glass
panels (the front one is mobile and the
rear one fixed) and is fitted with an
electrically operated sun blind.
Operation of the sunroof is only possible
with the ignition device at AVV.
The sun roof has three preset positions:
fully closed; comfort (intermediate
opening)l fully open.
IMPORTANT You cannot have the blind
closed when the roof is open.
OPENING
Press the
symbol on button 1 fig. 37:
the roof will open to the comfort position.
A second press will open it fully.
A long press of the same button will open
the roof until it is released, or if held
down, until it reaches the comfort
position. Use the button in the same way
to open the roof fully from that position.
11)
The automatic motion can be interrupted
in any position by pressing button
1 again.
If the electric blind is closed, the roof
opening control opens it too.
36
37
04186S0001EM
CLOSING
From the position of complete opening
symbol:
press button 1 next to the
the roof will close completely.
A long press of the same button moves
the roof until it is released.
The automatic motion can be interrupted
in any position by pressing button
1 again.
SWIVEL OPENING
To bring the roof to the swivel position,
press and release button 2 fig. 37.
This type of swivel opening can be
activated irrespective of the position of
the sunroof. When starting with the roof
in closed position, pressing the button
automatically causes its swivel-opening.
If the roof is already open, pressing the
button will open it to the swivel position.
Pressing button 2 again during automatic
movement of the roof will stop it.
BLIND MOVEMENT
The sun blind is electrically operated.
Press the
symbol on button 3fig. 37:
to open the sun blind.
Press button 3
symbol: to close the
sun blind.
The automatic motion can be interrupted
in any position by pressing button
3 again.
If the roof is open, the sun blind closing
control will also close the roof.
ANTI-PINCH DEVICE
The sun roof has an anti-pinch safety
system capable of detecting the
presence of an obstacle during the
closing movement: if this happens, the
system intervenes and the movement of
the roof is immediately reversed into
opening.
INITIALISATION PROCEDURE
Automatic operation of the sunroof must
be initialised again in case of faulty
sunroof operation.
IMPORTANT The anti-pinch safety
function is deactivated during the
initialisation procedure.
Proceed as follows:
press button 1 next to the
symbol
to bring the roof into completely closed
position;
bring the ignition device to STOP and
wait at least 10 seconds. Then set the
ignition device to AVV and start the
engine;
press the
symbol on button 1 and
hold it down; after 10 seconds you will
hear the electric motors of the roof and
blind stop in sequence;
release the button and within
symbol on
5 seconds, press the
button 1 and hold it down (until the cycle
end): the roof will automatically perform
a complete open and close cycle (to
indicate that the initialisation has been
successful). If this does not occur, the
procedure must be restarted from the
beginning.
WARNING
21) When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure you have the key with you to avoid the
risk of injury to those still inside the car due
to accidental operation of the sun roof.
Improper use of the roof can be dangerous.
Before and during operation, always check
that no-one is exposed to the risk of being
injured by the moving sunroof or by objects
getting caught or hit by it.
IMPORTANT
11) Do not open the sun roof if a roof rack or
crossbars are fitted. Do not open the sun
roof if there is snow or ice on it: you may
damage it.
37
KNOWING YOUR CAR
BONNET
lift the bonnet slightly from right to
left as indicated by the arrow on release
device fig. 40;
OPENING
22) 23)
Proceed as follows:
inside the passenger compartment
pull the release lever, fig. 38 fig. 39;
IMPORTANT Always check that the
bonnet is closed correctly to prevent it
from opening while the vehicle is
travelling. Since the bonnet is equipped
with a double locking system, one for
each side, you must check that it is closed
on both its side ends.
WARNING
40
38
04196V0001EM
04196V0002EM
raise the bonnet completely: the
operation is facilitated by the presence
of two gas shock absorbers which hold it
the all open position.
Do not tamper with the shock absorber
and accompany the bonnet while lifting it.
CLOSING
22) 24)
39
04196V0003EM
go to the outside of the car and
position yourself in front of the grille;
38
To close, lower the bonnet to
approximately 16 in (40 centimetres)
from the engine compartment then let it
drop. Make sure that the bonnet is
completely closed and not only fastened
by the locking device by trying to open it.
If it is not perfectly closed, do not try to
press the bonnet down but open it and
repeat the procedure.
22) Perform these operations only when the
car is stationary.
23) Use both hands to lift the bonnet. Before
lifting, check that the windscreen wiper arms
are not raised from the windscreen or in
operation, that the vehicle is stationary and
that the electric parking brake is engaged.
24) For safety reasons, the bonnet must
always be properly closed while the car is
travelling. Therefore, make sure that the
bonnet is properly closed and that the lock is
engaged. If you discover that the bonnet is
not perfectly closed during travel, stop
immediately and close the bonnet in the
correct manner.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
TAILGATE
The tailgate is operated electrically, so
pay the utmost attention before
activating its movement.
Safe opening and closing of the tailgate is
guaranteed by a protection system that
can automatically stop its movement
when it encounters an obstacle while
opening or closing.
When the car is moving, tailgate
unlocking and movement are disabled.
To avoid difficulties in tight spaces, you
can set the height at which to block the
tailgate open.
Customising the tailgate opening height
To customise the tailgate opening
position, proceed as described below:
open the tailgate;
manually move it to the position that
you want to store;
press one of the closing buttons 2 or 3
fig. 47 for at least 5 seconds (successful
acquisition is indicated by the direction
indicators flashing three times).
The tailgate is now programmed to open
to the set position.
This function can be selected on the
Connect system fig. 41 (where provided).
41
04206V0008EM
Setting the tailgate opening height to a
preset position (where provided)
To set the tailgate opening height to one
of the four preset positions, proceed as
described below:
on the Connect system, press the
MENU button to activate the main menu
and select the following functions in
succession: “Settings”, “Doors & Locks”
and “Electric tailgate”. Select and
activate them by turning the Rotary Pad
fig. 42 and pressing it;
42
04206V0019EM
turn the Rotary Pad to select one of
the four preset positions and press it to
activate the selected position fig. 43.
43
04206V0007EM
OPENING
IMPORTANT A beeper always sounds
while the tailgate is in motion.
39
KNOWING YOUR CAR
CLOSING
Opening from the outside
When unlocked, the tailgate can be
opened from outside the vehicle by
pressing the electric opening button
fig. 44 located between the number plate
lights, for about one second until you hear
the unlocking click, or by quickly pressing
button on the remote control
the
twice.
45
44
04056V0005EM
04206V0002EM
BOOT EMERGENCY OPENING
There is a flap fig. 46 on the luggage
compartment internal trim, next to the
tailgate lock, accessible by folding down
the rear seat backrest, which allows
access to the manual lock opening cord.
Pull the cord to release the lock.
The tailgate can now be opened manually.
Opening from the inside
When it is locked, the tailgate can be
opened from inside the car by lifting the
button 1 fig. 45 on the driver’s door panel
trim.
47
04056V0055EM
IMPORTANT It is possible to stop the
tailgate moving with any of the close
buttons.
IMPORTANT You can stop the tailgate
moving by pressing the same button
again.
46
40
Closing from outside
It is possible to close the tailgate by
pressing:
the button 2 fig. 47 on the tailgate
interior trim;
the button 3 on the tailgate interior
trim, (all the doors, including the tailgate,
will be locked);
the
button on the remote
control twice quickly;
the button fig. 44 on the tailgate,
between the number plate lights.
04206V0014EM
Closing from inside
Press the button 1 fig. 45 on the driver’s
door panel trim and hold it down until the
operation is complete.
IMPORTANT It is possible to stop the
tailgate moving by releasing the button.
AUTOMATICALLY OPENING AND
CLOSING THE ELECTRICALLY
OPERATED TAILGATE IN “HANDS FREE”
MODE
(where provided)
To operate the system in “Hands free”
mode, proceed as follows:
if the doors are locked or unlocked, the
system must recognize the electronic key
fob near the tailgate;
go to the rear of the car, in the centre
and about 20 in (50 cm) from the tailgate;
move your foot under the bumper,
simulating a kick. When you have done
this movement, withdraw your leg. To
activate the movement, both sensors
must detect your leg fig. 48.
48
If it is closed, the electrically
operated/Hands free tailgate:
unlocks and opens completely;
with another movement of the foot, it
stops;
a further movement of the foot
reverses the direction and closes the
tailgate completely, if you do not stop it
again.
If it is open, with a movement of the foot,
the electrically operated/Hands free
tailgate:
closes completely;
another movement of the foot before
it closes completely will stop it;
if the tailgate was stopped, another
movement of the foot reverses the
direction and opens it completely.
You can activate/deactivate the
automatic tailgate opening and closing
function in “Hand Free” mode on the
Connect system by pressing the MENU
button to select the Main menu, and
selecting the following items in
succession: “Settings”, “Doors & Locks”
and “Automatic tailgate opening”. Select
them by turning the Rotary Pad and
pressing it.
IMPORTANT Before lifting the foot off
the ground, make sure that you are in
stable position. Do not touch any part of
the car. There is a risk of injury from
touching, for example, the very hot
exhaust system.
IMPORTANT To conserve the battery
charge, avoid performing this operation
repeatedly with the engine off.
IMPORTANT To prevent accidentally
opening the tailgate when washing the
car at a car wash station or using a
high-pressure cleaner, use the Connect
system to disable the “Automatic tailgate
opening” function.
TAILGATE INITIALISATION
IMPORTANT If the battery is
disconnected or the protection fuse
blows, the tailgate opening/closing
mechanism must be reinitialised as
follows:
close all the doors and the tailgate;
press the
button on the remote
control;
press the
button on the remote
control.
04206V0015EM
41
This page is intentionally left blank
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTROL PANEL AND ON-BOARD INSTRUMENTS . . . . . . . . .44
DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
This section of the handbook gives you all the information you
need to understand, interpret and use
the instrument panel correctly.
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTROL PANEL AND ON-BOARD INSTRUMENTS
VERSIONS WITH 3.5” TFT DISPLAY
49
05026S0010EM
1. Rev counter 2. Digital engine oil temperature gauge with overheating warning light 3. TFT Display 4. Digital fuel level gauge
(the triangle on the left side of the symbol indicates the side of the vehicle with the fuel filler) 5. Speedometer
44
VERSIONS WITH 7” TFT DISPLAY
50
05026S0011EM
1. Rev counter 2. Digital engine oil temperature gauge with overheating warning light 3. TFT Display 4. Digital fuel level gauge
(the triangle on the left side of the symbol indicates the side of the vehicle with the fuel filler) 5. Speedometer
Apart from the instrument panel display size, there may be small differences according to the version or the end market destination
of the car.
45
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
The vehicle can be equipped with a 3.5" or 7" TFT Display.
RECONFIGURABLE TFT DISPLAY
During operation, the display is divided into multiple sections which show driving data, warnings and failure indications. This shows
the display layout, identifying the various sections.
51
05036S0115EM
1. Transmission information. 2. Front, side anti-collision systems, Cruise Control. 3. Speed limit warning
light. 4. Reconfigurable main area. 5. Compass. 6. Odometer. 7. Failure/information symbols (e.g. danger of ice, open doors,
ABS operation, etc.). 8. Range (7" TFT Display only). 9. Light icons (dipped beam/high beam) (solo 7” TFT Display).
46
1 Transmission Information
Shows the following information related
to the transmission operation mode (M, P,
R, N, D).
If the gear is changed using the steering
wheel lever (where provided), In D mode
or manual M mode, it also displays the
engaged gear.
In M mode, it also shows when to shift
gear up or down.
2 Front, side anti-collision systems,
Cruise Control
Displays the operation the following
modes:
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
Cruise Control (CC) or Active Cruise
Control (ACC) (where provided)
For further information, see relevant
paragraphs.
3 Speed limit warning light
Shows information regarding the Speed
Limiter function.
For further information, see relevant
paragraph.
4 Reconfigurable main area
Can display the following screens:
Home
Trip A
Trip B (can be activated/deactivated
on the Connect system)
Performance
The screens can be selected, on rotation,
by pressing the button shown in fig. 52.
Outside temperature (on the 3.5" FT
display shown only if the Phone function
repeat mode has not previously been
activated).
Current speed (shown if the repeat
modes of the Phone and Navigation
functions have not been previously
activated).
Range (on the 3.5" FT display shown if
the Radio and Media functions repeat
mode have not been previously
activated).
52
Trip A and B
The "Trip computer" can be used to
display, for all driving modes (Dynamic,
Normal, Advanced Efficiency) and with
the ignition device ON, the
measurements regarding the operating
state of the car. This function is
characterised by two separate records,
called “Trip A” and “Trip B” (the latter can
be deactivated by the Connect system),
where the car’s “complete missions”
(journeys) are recorded in a reciprocally
independent manner.
“Trip A” and “Trip B” allow you to see the
following values:
Distance travelled
Average fuel consumption
Average speed
Active trip
Fuel consumption indicator (7" TFT
Display only)
05036V0002EM
Depending on the chosen driving mode
(Dynamic / Dynamic + (where provided),
Normal, Advanced Efficiency), which can
be selected through the “Alfa DNA™”
system, the screens can be graphically
different. The navigation instructions and
call information can be repeated on the
Connect system display and also in this
area of the display. These functions can
be set on the Connect system.
Home
The parameters shown on the display, for
the modes: Dynamic / Dynamic + (where
provided), Normal and Advanced
Efficiency are:
Time (on the 3.5" FT display shown
only if the Phone function repeat mode
has not previously been activated).
47
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
To reset the values, press and hold down
the button on the right stalk fig. 52.
Performance
The displayed parameters are different
in function from the active mode, and the
modes can be selected through the “Alfa
DNA™” system and are as follows:
Normal: The screen graphically
reproduces some parameters closely
linked to the efficiency of the driving
style, with a view to limiting consumption;
Advanced Efficiency: The three central
icons on the screen indicate the
effectiveness of the driving style, linked
to the following parameters:
acceleration, deceleration and gear
shifts, with a view to limiting
consumption. The bar below the icons
shows current consumption and the
green line represents the optimal area.
The globe (7" TFT Display) lights up
gradually according to lower
consumption.
Dynamic / Dynamic + (where
provided): The displayed parameters are
related to car stability, the graphs
illustrate the trend of the
longitudinal/lateral accelerations
(G-meter information), considering
gravity acceleration as a reference unit.
Lateral acceleration peaks are also
indicated.
48
5 Compass
Views the position indicating the cardinal
point.
6 Milometer
Indicates the total kilometres (or miles)
travelled.
7 Failure warning lights
Area dedicated to displaying failures, the
following symbols could be displayed on
rotation:
Low criticality symbols (yellow amber).
High criticality symbols (red).
8 Car range (7" TFT Display only)
Indicates the kilometres (or miles) left
before the fuel tank is empty.
PARAMETERS SET BY USER
A series of user-programmable functions
can be set using the Connect system.
The basic settings only are described:
Units & Language
Time & Date
Control panel
To access the list with the
aforementioned items, proceed as
follows: from the main menu, activated
by pressing the MENU button fig. 53,
select the function "Settings", by turning
and pressing the Rotary Pad.
Turn the Rotary Pad to choose the
desired option and press to activate it.
9 Light icons (7” TFT Display only)
Displays the icon related to the active
mode among the following:
dipped beam headlights;
main beam headlights;
Auto low beam headlights;
Auto main beam headlights.
53
05036V0040EM
Units & Language
54
Time and Date
05036S0016EM
The following settings can be modified
when this mode is selected fig. 54:
Measure units (by selecting this item
you can choose between the metric,
imperial or custom systems; this last
option lets you set the measure unit for
each individual size).
Language (by selecting this item you
can choose the system viewing language).
Restore Settings (allows you to delete
the settings from this menu and restore
the default settings).
To access and adjust the various settings,
turn and press the Rotary Pad to select
and confirm the selection.
55
Control panel
05036S0017EM
The following settings can be modified
when this mode is selected fig. 55:
Sync with GPS Time (activates/
deactivates the clock synchronization
through the GPS; if the function is
deactivated, the options Set Time and
Set Date are enabled).
Set time (allows to manually set the
time).
Time format (allows to choose the
time format between a 12-hour and a
24-hour clock).
Set date (to set the date manually).
Restore Settings (allows you to delete
the settings from this menu and restore
the default settings).
To access and adjust the various settings,
turn and press the Rotary Pad to select
and confirm the selection.
56
05036S0018EM
The following settings can be modified
when this mode is selected fig. 56:
Warning buzzer Volume (allows you to
set the volume of the warning buzzer to
seven levels).
Trip B (allows you to activate/
deactivate the function).
Phone Repeat (allows to
activate/deactivate the repetition of the
phone function screens on the instrument
panel display as well).
Audio repeat (allows to
activate/deactivate the repetition of the
audio (Radio and Media) function screens
on the instrument panel display as well).
Nav Repeat (allows you to
activate/deactivate the repetition of the
navigator function screens on the
instrument panel display as well).
49
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
Restore Settings (allows you to delete
the settings from this menu and restore
the default settings).
To access and adjust the various settings,
turn and press the Rotary Pad to select
and confirm the selection.
50
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IMPORTANT The warning light switches on together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information
contained in the Owner Handbook, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. In the event of a failure indication, always
refer to the contents of this chapter.
IMPORTANT The failure indicators appearing on the display are divided into two categories: very serious and less serious faults.
Serious faults are indicated by a repeated and prolonged warning "cycle". Less serious faults are indicated by a warning "cycle" with a
shorter duration. You can stop the warning cycle in both cases by pressing the button located on the windscreen wiper lever. The
instrument panel warning light will stay on until the cause of the failure is eliminated.
51
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING LIGHTS ON INSTRUMENT PANEL
Possible detailed messages and/or acoustic signalling can be matched to a few warning lights and symbols.
Red warning lights
Warning
light
What it means
INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID / ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE ON
The warning light switches on when the ignition device is brought to ON, but it should switch off after a few seconds.
Low brake fluid level
The warning light turns on when the level of the brake fluid in the reservoir falls below the minimum level, possibly due to a leak in
the circuit.
Go to an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the system checked as soon as possible.
Electric parking brake on
The warning light switches on when the electric parking brake is engaged.
Release the electric parking brake, then check that the warning light has switched off.
If the warning light stays on, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
IMPORTANT If the car is parked on a gradient of more than 30% and/or the brake temperature is greater than 662°F (350°C),
when the parking brake is engaged, the warning light will flash to indicate a potentially unsafe condition.
EBD FAILURE
The simultaneous switching on of the
(red) and
(amber) warning lights with the engine on indicates either a failure of the
EBD system or that the system is not available. In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly lock and the vehicle may swerve when
braking sharply.
Drive very carefully to the nearest Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the system inspected immediately.
52
Warning
light
What it means
AIR BAG FAILURE
The warning light switches on when the ignition device is brought to ON, but it should switch off after a few seconds. If the warning
light switches on constantly, this indicates a failure in the airbag system.
25) 26)
FRONT SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED
The warning light switches on constantly if the vehicle is stationary and the driver side or passenger side seat belt, with the
passenger seated, is not fastened. The warning light flashes and a buzzer will sound if the vehicle is in motion and the driver side or
passenger side seat belt, with the passenger seated, is not correctly fastened.
Fasten or check correct fastening of the front occupants' seat belts.
EXCESSIVE ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
The warning light switches on in the case of engine oil overheating.
If the problem persists, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
12)
WARNING
25) The fault of the
warning light is signalled by the switching on of the
icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may not
indicate any faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the system checked immediately.
26) If the
warning light does not switch on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message on
the display), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the airbags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or,
in a lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the system checked
immediately.
IMPORTANT
12) If the symbol switches on when driving, stop the vehicle and the engine immediately.
53
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
Amber warning lights
Warning
light
What it means
ABS FAILURE
The warning light switches on when the ignition device is brought to ON, but it should switch off after a few seconds.
The warning light switches on to indicate an ABS fault. In this case the braking system maintains its efficiency unaltered but
without the advantage of the ABS system.
Drive carefully and contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
TPMS FAILURE
The warning light switches on when a failure is detected in the TPMS. Should one or more wheels be fitted without sensors, the
display will show a warning message until initial conditions are restored.
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tyres as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. Immediately restore the correct inflation pressure using the Tire Repair Kit (see "Repairing a wheel" paragraph in the "In
an emergency" chapter) and contact the dedicated Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
Tyre pressure low
The warning light switches on to indicate that the tyre pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure
loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tyre duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
In any situation in which the message on the display is "See manual", it is ESSENTIAL to refer to the contents of the "Wheels and
rims" paragraph in the "Technical data" chapter, strictly complying with the indications that you find there.
ESC SYSTEM
When the ignition device is brought to ON, the warning light switches on, but should switch off as soon as the engine is started.
ESC system intervention: Intervention by the system is indicated by the flashing of the warning light: it indicates that the car is in
critical stability and grip conditions.
ECS system failure: If the warning light does not switch off, or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure was found in the ESC
system.
In these cases, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
Hill Start Assist system failure: the switching on of the warning light indicates a Hill Start Assist system failure.
In these cases, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
PARTIAL / TOTAL DEACTIVATION OF ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS
When the ignition device is brought to ON, the warning light switches on, but should switch off as soon as the engine is started.
The warning light switches on to indicate that some active safety systems have been partially or totally deactivated.
For further details about the active safety systems see the "Active safety systems" paragraph in the "Safety" chapter. When the
active safety systems are reactivated, the warning light switches off.
54
Warning
light
What it means
FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGE
The warning light (or the icon on the display) turns on when there are about 1.8 UK gal (8 litres) of fuel left in the tank, for Diesel
versions, and about 2 UK gal (9 litres) of fuel for petrol versions.
27)
INJECTION / EOBD SYSTEM FAILURE
In normal conditions, when the ignition device is brought to ON, the warning light switches on, but it should switch off as soon as the
engine is started.
The operation of the warning light may be checked by the traffic police using specific devices. Comply with the laws and
regulations of the country where you are driving.
13)
Injection system failure
If the warning light remains on, or it switches on whilst driving, the injection system is not working properly. The warning light on
constantly signals a malfunction in the supply/ignition system which could cause high exhaust emissions, a possible loss of
performance, poor driveability and high consumption.
The warning light switches off if the malfunction disappears, but is still stored by the system.
Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue travelling at moderate speed but without demanding excessive effort from the
engine or high speed. Prolonged use of the car with the warning light on constantly may cause damage. Contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership as soon as possible.
Catalytic converter damaged
If the warning light flashes, it means that the catalytic converter may be damaged.
Release the accelerator pedal to lower the speed of the engine until the warning light stops flashing. Continue the journey at
moderate speed, trying to avoid driving conditions that may cause further flashing and contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon
as possible.
WARNING
27) If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes whilst driving, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
IMPORTANT
13) If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light
does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when travelling (on some versions
together with the message on the display), contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
55
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
Warning
light
What it means
AdBlue® (UREA) INJECTION SYSTEM FAILURE (2.2 JTD versions only)
The warning light appears, on some versions together with a dedicated message on the instrument cluster display, if a fluid not
conforming with nominal features is introduced or if an average AdBlue® (UREA) consumption of over 50% is detected.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
If the problem is not solved, a specific message will appear on the instrument panel display whenever a certain threshold is reached
until it will no longer be possible to start the engine. When there are approximately 124 miles (200 km) before you will no longer
able to restart the engine, on some versions a dedicated message will appear fixed on the instrument panel display accompanied
by warning tone.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER DAMAGED (2.0 T4 MAir versions with GPF only)
If the warning light flashes, it means that the catalytic converter may be damaged.
Release the accelerator pedal to lower the speed of the engine until the warning light stops flashing. Continue the journey at
moderate speed, trying to avoid driving conditions that may cause further flashing and contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon
as possible.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCW) (where available)
This warning light informs the driver that the frontal collision alarm function is not enabled.
REAR FOG LIGHT
The warning light switches on when the rear fog light is activated.
56
Green warning lights
Warning
light
What it means
SIDE LIGHTS AND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS
The warning light switches on when the side lights or dipped headlights are turned on.
"Follow me" function engaged
This function allows the headlights to remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition device was placed in STOP position.
FOG LIGHTS
The warning light comes on when the front fog lights are turned on.
LEFT DIRECTION INDICATOR
The warning light switches on when the direction indicator control stalk is moved downwards or, together with the right direction
indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed.
RIGHT DIRECTION INDICATOR
The warning light switches on when the direction indicator control stalk is moved upwards or, together with the left direction
indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS (on 3.5" TFT Display)
This warning light comes on when the automatic main beam headlights are activated.
Blue warning lights
Warning
light
What it means
MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS (on 3.5" TFT display)
The symbol comes on when the main beam headlights are activated.
57
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
SYMBOLS ON THE DISPLAY
Red symbols
Symbol
What it means
LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
The symbol indicates that the engine oil pressure is low.
If it turns on temporarily or flashes (for about 5 seconds), check the oil level by following the corresponding procedure (see the
description in the “Checking levels” paragraph in the “Maintenance and care” chapter) and top up to the correct level if necessary.
If the symbol turns on continuously, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the system checked.
WARNING IF THE SYMBOL TURNS ON CONTINUOUSLY: Do not use the car until the failure has been solved. When the symbol
turns on, it does not indicate the amount of oil in the engine: the oil level can be checked on the display upon entering the vehicle
and also by activating the "Oil level" function on the Connect system.
14)
ALTERNATOR FAILURE
The switching on of the symbol with engine on corresponds to an alternator failure.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
POWER STEERING FAILURE
If the symbol remains on, you could not have steering assistance and the effort required to operate the steering wheel could be
increased; steering is, however, possible.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
ALFA™ SYSTEM STEERING TORQUE (AST) FAILURE
The switching on of the symbol signals a failure in the automatic steering correction system.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the system checked.
IMPORTANT
14) If the
58
symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
Symbol
What it means
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH
The symbol lights up when the engine has overheated.
In normal driving conditions: stop the car, switch off the engine and check that the coolant level in the reservoir is not below the
MIN mark. In this case, wait for the engine to cool down, then slowly and carefully open the cap, top up with coolant and check that
the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the reservoir itself. Also check visually for any fluid leaks. Contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership if the symbol comes on when the engine is started again.
If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. in high-performance driving): slow down and, if the warning light stays on,
stop the vehicle. Stop for 2 or 3 minutes with the engine running and slightly accelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation,
then turn the engine off. Check that the coolant level is correct as described above.
IMPORTANT Over demanding routes, it is advisable to keep the engine running and slightly accelerated for a few minutes before
turning it off.
DOOR OPEN
The symbol switches on when one or more doors are not completely shut. An acoustic signal is activated with the doors open and
the car moving.
Close the doors properly.
BONNET NOT PROPERLY SHUT
The symbol turns on when the bonnet is not properly closed, along with the icon, an image of the car with an open bonnet also
appears on the display.
A buzzer is heard when the bonnet is open and the vehicle is moving.
Close the bonnet properly.
TAILGATE NOT PROPERLY SHUT
The symbol turns on when the tailgate is not properly closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an open tailgate also
appears on the display.
A buzzer is heard with open tailgate and vehicle moving.
Close the tailgate properly.
59
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
Symbol
What it means
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FAILURE
The symbol switches on, together with a buzzer warning, to indicate that the automatic transmission is faulty.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
15)
INSUFFICIENTENGINEOILLEVEL
~ Ť} }} }Ť } ţ }}
~ Φƻ }Ɠ ƻ}}}
ƻ} }}}ƻ} } } ~ơţ
}} } Ť } }~ Ť} ~~}Φƻ }
~ }ƻ}}} ƻ } } ƻ}} } ơţ
OntheQuadrifoglioversion,thelevelmustalsobecheckedusingthedipstickbelowtheboot(seechapter"Servicingandcare").
OILOVERMAXIMUMLEVEL
Thesymbolswitcheson,alongwiththerespectivemessageonthedisplay,toindicatethattheengineoillevelistoohigh.
GotoanAlfaRomeodealershipassoonaspossibletohavethecorrectlevelrestored.Runtheengineunder3000rpmduringthis
time.
BRAKE DISC TEMPERATURE
When the symbol turns on, it indicates an excessive temperature of the brake discs.
Let the braking system cool down by reducing the speed.
SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED
(only SASO version)
The symbol switches on when the speed limit of 74.5 mph (120 km/h) is exceeded.
IMPORTANT
15) Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severely damage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil may also overheat: contact with hot
engine or with exhaust components at high temperature could cause fires.
60
Amber symbols
Symbol
What it means
ENGINE IMMOBILIZER FAILURE / BREAK-IN ATTEMPT
Engine Immobilizer system failure
The symbol switches on to report a failure of the Engine Immobilizer system. Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as
possible.
Break-in attempt
The symbol switches on when the ignition device is moved to ON position, to indicate a possible break-in attempt detected by the
alarm system.
Electronic key not recognised
The symbol switches on when the engine is started and the electronic key is not recognized by the system.
Alarm system failure
This symbol switches on to report an alarm system failure.
FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM OPERATION
The symbol switches on in the event of fuel cut-off system intervention.
For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to the description in the "Fuel cut-off system" section in the "In an emergency"
chapter. If it is not possible to restore the fuel supply, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
ENGINE OIL DETERIORATED
(where provided)
The symbol is displayed only for a limited time.
IMPORTANT After the first indication, each time the engine is started the symbol will continue to switch on as described above
until the oil is changed.
If the symbol flashes, this does not mean that there is a fault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is now necessary to
change the oil as a result of regular use of the vehicle. The deterioration of engine oil is accelerated by using the vehicle for short
drives, preventing the engine from reaching operating temperature.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
16)
IMPORTANT
16) Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 500 km after it first
switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the warranty. When this symbol comes on, it
does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so you do not need to top up the engine oil.
61
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
Symbol
What it means
GLOW PLUG PREHEATING (Diesel versions)
This warning light comes on when the ignition device is brought to ON and will switch off when the glow plugs have reached the
preset temperature. The engine can be started as soon as the symbol turns off.
IMPORTANT In mild or high temperature conditions, the symbol turns on for a very short time only.
GLOW PLUG PREHEATING FAILURE (Diesel versions)
If the symbol flashes, it indicates a fault in the glow plug preheating system.
In this case, contact the Alfa Romeo Service Network as soon as possible.
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE
The symbol switches on in the event of engine oil level sensor failure.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE
The symbol switches on in the event of engine oil level sensor failure.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM FAILURE
The symbol appears in the event of failure of the Forward Collision Warning system.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
START & STOP EVO SYSTEM FAILURE
This symbol switches on to report a Stop & Start Evo system failure.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.
RAIN SENSOR FAILURE
The symbol switches on in the case of failure of the automatic windscreen wiper.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
DUSK SENSOR FAILURE
The symbol switches on in the case of failure of the automatic low beam alignment.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM FAILURE
The symbol comes on in the event of a Blind Spot Monitoring system failure.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
62
Symbol
What it means
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE
The symbol switches on in the event of fuel level sensor failure.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILURE
The symbol switches on to indicate a failure on the following lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parking lights / trailer direction
indicators (if present) / trailer lights (if present) / side lights / direction indicators / rear fog light / reversing light / brake lights /
number plate lights.
The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown protection fuse or an interruption of the electrical connection.
Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
KEYLESS START SYSTEM FAILURE
The symbol switches on in the event of Keyless Start system failure.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILURE
The symbol switches on in the event of fuel cut-off system failure.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDW) FAILURE
The symbol comes on also in the case of a fault to the Lane Departure Warning system.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE
(where provided)
The symbol switches on to report a failure of the automatic main beam headlights.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.
WATER IN DIESEL FILTER (Diesel versions)
The symbol switches on constantly when driving, along to indicate the presence of water in the diesel filter.
17)
IMPORTANT
17) The presence of water in the fuel system circuit may cause severe damage to the injection system and irregular engine operation. If the
symbol is displayed contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible to bleed the system. If the above indications come on immediately
after refuelling, water has probably been introduced into the tank: stop the engine immediately and contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
63
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
Symbol
What it means
DPF CLEANING (particulate trap) in progress (diesel versions with DPF only)
The symbol comes on when the ignition device is brought to ON, but it should switch off after a few seconds.
The symbol switches on constantly to indicate that the DPF system needs to eliminate the trapped pollutants (particulate) through
the regeneration process.
The symbol does not switch on during every DPF regeneration, but only when driving conditions require that the driver is notified.
To turn off the symbol, keep the vehicle in motion until the regeneration process is over. The process normally takes about
15 minutes. Optimal conditions for completing the process are achieved by travelling at 37 mph (60 km/h) with engine speed
above 2000 rpm.
When this symbol switches on, it does not indicate a fault and thus it should not be taken to a workshop.
GPF (Gasoline Particulate Filter) CLEANING in progress (2.0 T4 MAir versions only)
The symbol comes on when the ignition device is brought to ON, but it should switch off after a few seconds.
The symbol switches on fixed, together with a dedicated message on the display, to indicate that the GPF system needs to
eliminate the trapped pollutants (particulate) by means of the regeneration process.
The symbol does not light up on during every GPF regeneration, but only when driving conditions require that the driver is notified.
To turn off the symbol, keep the vehicle in motion until the regeneration process is over. The optimal conditions for completing the
process are achieved by varying the speed of the car (pressure on the accelerator pedal). Hold a speed faster than 37 mph
(60 km/h), on extra-urban roads, until the symbol and the message disappear from the display.
When this symbol switches on, it does not indicate an anomaly and thus it should not be taken to a workshop.
GPF (Gasoline Particulate Filter) FAILURE (2.0 T4 MAir versions only)
warning light and dedicated messages appear on the display
The symbol lights up fixed together with the
in case of failure to the GPF (Gasoline Particulate Filter).
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATING
The symbol switches on in the case of transmission overheating, after a particularly demanding use. In this case an engine
performance limitation is carried out.
With engine off or at idle speed, wait until the symbol switches off.
TRAILER LIGHT CONTROL UNIT FAILURE
The symbol turns on to warn of failure in the control unit that manages the trailer lights.
Check that the trailer light is correctly connected to the socket. If the fault persists the next time you start the engine, contact the
Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible to have the system checked.
64
Symbol
What it means
AUDIO SYSTEM FAILURE
The symbol switches on to report a failure of the audio system.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.
ABS ACTIVATION
The symbol appears when the ABS cuts in.
SPEED LIMITER SYSTEM FAILURE
While driving, the symbol switches on to signal a Speed Limiter system failure.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.
INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
If the symbol switches on, it indicates a low engine coolant level condition.
Top up as described in the "Maintenance and Care" chapter.
FUEL TANK CAP
Lights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properly closed.
Tighten the cap properly.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE FAILURE
The symbol and the the respective message appear on the display to indicate a failure in the electric parking brake system. This
failure could partially or completely block the car because the electric parking brake could remain activated even if automatically
or manually disengaged using the relevant controls.
If the car can still be used (electric parking brake not engaged), drive carefully to the nearest Alfa Romeo dealership, remembering
that the electric parking brake will not work.
28)
WARNING
28) If a failure is present with sharp braking, the rear wheels may lock and the vehicle may swerve.
65
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
Symbol
What it means
GENERIC INDICATION
Signals information and failures. The accompanying messages describe the failure.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE
This symbol switches on to report a four wheel drive system failure.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.
TEMPORARY FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE (where provided)
The symbol will appear to indicate that the AWD dynamic control system is temporarily deactivated to prevent damage because of
high engine load. The traction system will work in RWD mode in this case.
Until the symbol appears on the display, reduce the load to allow the system to cool down. The AWD system will resume normal
operation when the symbol disappears from the display.
DYNAMIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE
The symbol appears to indicate the dynamic traction control system failure.
AFS SYSTEM FAILURE
The symbol appears to indicate the automatic directional light system failure.
Go to an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the system checked.
SOFT SUSPENSION CALIBRATION INSERTION (where provided)
The system appears when the most comfortable suspension setting is activated.
SHOCK ABSORBER FAILURE (ADC) (where provided)
While driving, if the symbol switches on, it signals a failure in the suspension system.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the system checked.
TAILGATE ELECTRIC OPENING/CLOSING FAILURE
The symbol turns on to indicate a tailgate electric opening/closing system failure.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.
ELECTRIC TOW HOOK FAILURE
The symbol turns on to indicate an electric towing hook extraction/closing system failure.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.
66
Symbol
What it means
WINDSCREEN WASHER LIQUID LEVEL
The symbol appears for some seconds to indicate that the level of the windscreen and headlight washing fluid (if any) is low.
Refill the liquid: to do this, please consult the "Level check" section in the "Service and care" chapter. Always use liquid with the
features indicated in the "Liquids and lubricants" section in the "Technical information" chapter.
LOW AdBlue® (UREA) DIESEL EMISSIONS ADDITIVE LEVEL WARNING (2.2 JTD versions only)
The Diesel Emissions Additive (UREA) low level symbol
lights when the UREA level is low.
A warning and a message indicating the need to top up AdBlue® (UREA) also appear on the display.
The symbol
stays on until the tank is topped up with at least 1.11 UK gal - 5 litres of AdBlue® (UREA).
If you do not top up, a specific message will appear on the instrument panel display whenever a certain threshold is reached until it
will no longer be possible to start the engine.
A message will appear permanently on the instrument panel and an acoustic tone will be heard when there is about 125 miles
(200 km) of range left.
A specific message will appear on the instrument panel display when there are 0 miles (0 km) of range left. It will no longer be
possible to restart the engine after it has been stopped. It will be possible to restart the engine after pouring at least 1.11 UK gal –
5 litres of AdBlue® (UREA) into the tank. Top up the AdBlue® (UREA) tank as soon as possible with at least 1.11 UK gal - 5 litres of
AdBlue® (UREA). If topping up is done with remaining range of AdBlue® (UREA) in the tank equal to 0 miles (0 zero), you may need to
wait 2 minutes before starting the engine.
18)
IMPORTANT
18) When the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is empty and the engine is stopped it is no longer possible to restart it until the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is topped
up with at least 5 litres of AdBlue® (UREA).
67
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
Symbol
What it means
ACTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE
The symbol appears while driving to indicate a failure in the Adaptive Cruise Control system.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the system checked.
WEAR ON BRAKE PADS
Lights up when the brake pads have reached their wear limit. Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
IMPORTANT Always use genuine parts or similar because the Integrated Brake System (IBS) could detect anomalies.
PARK SENSORS SYSTEM FAILURE
If the symbol turns on, it indicates that the system is faulty or unavailable.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the system checked.
POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD
The symbol turns on when the outside temperature is below or equal to 37.4°F (3°C).
WINDSCREEN WIPER FAILURE
If the symbol turns on, it indicates a windscreen wiper failure. Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
68
Green symbols
Symbol
What it means
LOW BEAM HEADLIGHTS (on 7" TFT display)
The warning light switches on when the dipped beam headlights are turned on.
AUTOMATIC DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS (on 7" TFT display)
The symbol lights up when the automatic dipped beam headlights are on.
START & STOP EVO OPERATION
The warning light comes on in the event of Start & Stop Evo system intervention (stopping the engine).
When the engine is restarted, the warning light switches off (for the engine restarting modes see the "Start & Stop Evo" paragraph
in the "Starting and driving" chapter).
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
The symbol comes on when the Cruise Control system is activated.
ACTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
The symbol comes on when the Active Cruise Control system is activated.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL HDC SYSTEM
The symbol lights up when the HDC system intervenes.
Blue symbols
Symbol
What it means
AUTOMATIC MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS (on 7" TFT display)
The symbol comes on when the automatic main beam headlights are activated.
MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS (on 7" TFT display)
The symbol comes on when the main beam headlights are activated.
69
This page is intentionally left blank
SAFETY
ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SEAT BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SBA (Seat Belt Alert) SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRE-TENSIONERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHILD PROTECTION SYSTEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - AIRBAG .
The chapter that you are about to read is very important: it
describes the safety systems with which the vehicle is equipped
and provides instructions on how to use them correctly.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .72
. .76
. .86
. .86
. .88
. .89
. .91
.103
SAFETY
ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS
The vehicle may be equipped with the
following active safety devices:
ABS (Anti-Lock Brakes);
DTC (Drive Train Control);
ESC (Electronic Stability Control);
TC (Traction Control);
PBA (Panic Brake Assist);
HSA (Hill Start Assist);
AST (Alfa™ Steering Torque);
HDC (Hill Discent Control)
For the operation of the systems, see the
following pages.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
This system, which is an integral part of
the braking system, prevents one or more
wheels from locking and slipping in all
road surface conditions, irrespective of
the intensity of the braking action,
ensuring that the vehicle can be
controlled even during emergency
braking and optimising stopping
distances.
The system intervenes during braking
when the wheels are about to lock,
typically in emergency braking or
low-grip conditions, when locking may be
more frequent.
The system also improves control and
stability of the vehicle when braking on a
surface where the grip of the left and
right wheels varies, or on corners.
72
The Electronic Braking Force Distribution
(EBD) system completes the system
allowing the brake force to be distributed
between the front and rear wheels.
System intervention
The ABS equipped on this vehicle is
provided with the "Brake by wire"
(Integrated Brake System - IBS) function.
With this system, the brake pedal
command given by pressing the brake
pedal is not transmitted hydraulically but
electronically, therefore, the light
pulsation that could be felt on the pedal
with the traditional system is no longer
perceptible.
29) 30) 31) 32) 33) 34)
DTC (Drive Train Control) SYSTEM
(where provided)
Some versions of this vehicle are
equipped with a four-wheel drive system
(AWD), activated on request, which offers
an optimal drive for countless driving
conditions and road surfaces. The system
reduces the slipping of the tyres to a
minimum, automatically redistributing
the torque to the front and rear wheels,
as needed.
To maximize fuel savings, the car with
AWD automatically passes to rear-wheel
drive (RWD) when the road and
environmental conditions are such that
they would not cause the tyres to slip.
When the road and environmental
conditions require better traction, the
vehicle automatically goes to AWD mode.
35)
IMPORTANT If the system failure symbol
switches on, after starting the engine or
while driving, it means that the AWD
system is not working properly. If the
warning message activates frequently, it
is recommended to carry out the
maintenance operations.
36)
ESC (Electronic Stability Control)
SYSTEM
The ESC system improves the directional
control and stability of the car in various
driving conditions.
The ESC system corrects the car’s
understeer and oversteer, distributing
the brake force on the appropriate
wheels. The torque supplied by the
engine can also be reduced in order to
maintain control of the vehicle.
The ESC system uses sensors installed
on the car to determine the trajectory
that the driver intends to follow and
compares it with the car’s effective
trajectory. When the real trajectory
deviates from the desired trajectory, the
ESC system intervenes to counter the
vehicle’s understeer or oversteer.
Oversteer: occurs when the car is
turning more than it should according to
the angle of the steering wheel.
Understeer: occurs when the vehicle is
turning less than it should according to
the angle of the steering wheel.
System intervention
The intervention of the system is
indicated by the flashing of the ESC
warning light on the instrument panel, to
inform the driver that the vehicle
stability and grip are critical.
37) 38) 39) 40) 41)
TC (Traction Control) SYSTEM
The system automatically operates in the
event of slipping, loss of grip on wet
roads (aquaplaning) and acceleration on
slippery, snowy or icy roads, etc. on one
or both drive wheels. Depending on the
slipping conditions, two different control
systems are activated:
if the slipping involves both drive
wheels, the system intervenes, reducing
the power transmitted by the engine;
if the slipping only involves one of the
drive wheels, the BLD (Brake Limited
Differential) function is activated,
automatically braking the wheel which is
slipping (the behaviour of a self-locking
differential is simulated). This will
increase the engine torque transferred to
the wheel which isn't slipping.
System intervention
The intervention of the system is
indicated by the flashing of the ESC
warning light on the instrument panel, to
inform the driver that the vehicle
stability and grip are critical.
42) 43) 44) 45) 46)
PBA (Panic Brake Assist) SYSTEM
The PBA system is designed to improve
the vehicle’s braking capacity during
emergency braking.
The system detects emergency braking
by monitoring the speed and force with
which the brake pedal is pressed, and
consequently applies the optimal brake
pressure. This can reduce the braking
distance: the PBA system therefore
complements the ABS.
Maximum assistance from the PBA
system is obtained by pressing the brake
pedal very quickly. In addition, the brake
pedal should be pressed continuously
during braking, avoiding intermittent
presses, to get the most out of the
system. Do not reduce pressure on the
brake pedal until braking is no longer
necessary.
The PBA system is deactivated when the
brake pedal is released.
47) 48) 49)
HSA (Hill Start Assist) SYSTEM
This is an integral part of the ESC system
and facilitates starting on slopes,
activating automatically in the following
cases:
uphill: vehicle stationary on a road
with a gradient higher than 5%, engine
running, brake pressed and transmission
in neutral or gear other than reverse
engaged;
downhill: vehicle stationary on a road
with a gradient higher than 5%, engine
running, brake pressed and reverse gear
engaged.
When setting off, the ESC system control
unit maintains the braking pressure on
the wheels until the engine torque
necessary for starting is reached, or in
any case for a maximum of 2 seconds,
allowing your right foot to be moved
easily from the brake pedal to the
accelerator.
When two seconds have elapsed, without
starting, the system is automatically
deactivated, gradually releasing the
braking pressure. During this release
stage it is possible to hear a typical
mechanical brake release noise,
indicating the imminent movement of the
car.
50) 51)
73
SAFETY
AST (Alfa™ Steering Torque) SYSTEM
52)
The AST function integrates the ESC
system with the electric power steering
to increase the safety level of the whole
vehicle.
In critical situations (braking on surfaces
with different grip conditions), through
the AST function, the ESC system
controls the steering to implement an
additional torque contribution on the
steering wheel, to suggest the most
correct manoeuvre to the driver.
The coordinated action of the brakes and
steering increases the sensation of
safety and control of the vehicle.
HDC (Hill Descent Control) SYSTEM
(where provided)
On vehicles equipped in this way, this
function is an integral part of the ESC
system and is aimed at keeping the
vehicle at a constant speed during a
descent, operating autonomously and in
different ways on the brakes.
In this way the vehicle stability and
completely safe driving are guaranteed,
above all in poor grip conditions and
steep descents.
74
The system has three different modes:
Off: the system is deactivated;
Enabled: the system is enabled and
ready to intervene when the activation
conditions are met;
Active: the system actively controls
the car speed.
Enabling the system
To enable the system, press the button
fig. 57.
57
06006V0001EM
The system is enabled if the car speed is
below 20 mph (30 km/h). The system
stays enabled until the car speed reaches
37 mph (60 km/h): the system is disabled
at faster speed.
System activation is indicated by the
icon on the display
white
fig. 58 turning on fixed.
58
06006V0002EM
System activation
Once enabled, the HDC system will
activate automatically if the car is driven
downhill on a steep slope, higher than
8%.
The speed set for the HDC system can be
adjusted using the SET switch fig. 59 (in
the range from 1.25 mph - 15.5 mph to
6 km/h - 20 mph). Once the desired speed
has been reached, release the SET switch
and the HDC system will maintain the set
speed.
It is also possible to reduce the set speed
with the brake pedal. The system will
acquire the current speed when the pedal
is released as the reference.
Disabling the system
53)
59
07146V0017EM
If the car speed exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h), but remains below 37 mph
(60 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is
released, as soon as the car gets close to
the set speed, the HDC system will brake
to bring the car to the set speed.
The driver can cancel HDC system
intervention at any time by pressing the
accelerator pedal.
System deactivation
The HDC system is deactivated, but
remains available, if one of the following
conditions is met:
the car is on a descent with insufficient
gradient, below 8%, or a level surface, or
is going uphill;
P (Park) mode is engaged.
The system is disabled if one of the
following conditions is met:
fig. 57 button pressed;
Cruise Control / Active Cruise Control
is activated.
37 mph (60 km/h) is exceeded.
System deactivation is shown by the icon
on the display turning off.
WARNING
29) For maximum efficiency of the braking
system, a bedding-in period of about 500 km
(310 miles) is required: during this period it
is advisable to avoid sharp, repeated and
prolonged braking.
30) If the ABS intervenes, this indicates that
the grip of the tyres on the road is nearing its
limit: you must slow down to a speed
compatible with the available grip.
31) The ABS cannot overrule the natural
laws of physics, and cannot increase the grip
available according to the condition of the
road.
32) The ABS cannot prevent accidents,
including those due to excessive speed on
corners, driving on low-grip surfaces or
aquaplaning.
33) The capability of the ABS must never be
tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in
such a way as to compromise personal
safety and the safety of others.
34) For the correct operation of the ABS, the
tyres must of necessity be the same make
and type on all wheels, in perfect condition
and, above all, of the prescribed type and
dimensions.
35) There may be a brief delay in shifting to
AWD mode after a tyre slipping event.
36) When a DTC system failure symbol
appears, the driver must be aware of the
different driving reaction and therefore
reduce the speed. The symbol
warns the
driver not to drive in areas that require
four-wheel drive or on snow-covered roads.
37) The ESC system cannot alter the natural
laws of physics, and cannot increase grip,
which depends on the condition of the road.
38) The ESC system cannot prevent
accidents, including those due to excessive
speed on corners, driving on low-grip
surfaces or aquaplaning.
39) The capability of the ESC system must
never be tested irresponsibly and
dangerously, in such a way as to compromise
personal safety and the safety of others.
40) For the correct operation of the ESC
system, the tyres must necessarily be of the
same make and type on all wheels, in perfect
condition and, above all, of the prescribed
type and size.
41) ESC performance features must not
induce the driver to take unnecessary or
unwarranted risks. Your driving style must
always be suited to the road conditions,
visibility and traffic. The driver is, in any
case, responsible for safe driving.
42) For the correct operation of the TC
system, the tyres must of necessity be the
same make and type on all wheels, in perfect
condition and, above all, of the prescribed
type and dimensions.
75
SAFETY
43) TC performance features must not
induce the driver to take unnecessary or
unwarranted risks. Your driving style must
always be suited to the road conditions,
visibility and traffic. The driver is, in any
case, responsible for safe driving.
44) The TC system cannot overrule the
natural laws of physics, and cannot increase
the grip available according to the condition
of the road.
45) The TC system cannot prevent
accidents, including those due to excessive
speed on corners, driving on low-grip
surfaces or aquaplaning.
46) The capability of the TC must never be
tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in
such a way as to compromise personal
safety and the safety of others.
47) The PBA system cannot overrule the
natural laws of physics, and cannot increase
the grip available according to the condition
of the road.
48) The PBA system cannot prevent
accidents, including those due to excessive
speed on corners, driving on low-grip
surfaces or aquaplaning.
49) The capability of the PBA system must
never be tested irresponsibly and
dangerously, in such a way as to compromise
the safety of the driver, the other occupants
of the vehicle or any other road user.
50) The HSA system is not a parking brake;
therefore, never leave the vehicle without
having engaged the electric parking brake,
turned the engine off and engaged first gear,
so that it is parked in safe conditions (for
further information read the "Parking"
paragraph in the "Starting and driving"
chapter).
76
51) There may be situations on small
gradients (less than 8%), with vehicle laden,
in which the Hill Start Assist system may not
activate, causing a slight reversing motion
and increasing the risk of collision with
another vehicle or object. The driver is, in any
case, responsible for safe driving.
52) The AST system is an aid for driving and
does not relieve the driver of responsibility
for driving the vehicle.
53) The performance of a vehicle with HDC
must never be tested in imprudent or
dangerous ways, with the possibility of
putting the safety of the driver or other
people at risk.
DRIVING ASSISTANCE
SYSTEMS
The vehicle can feature the following
driving assistance systems:
BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring);
FCW (Forward Collision Warning);
TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System).
For the operation of the systems, see the
following pages.
BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring) SYSTEM
The BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring) system
uses two radar sensors, located in the
rear bumper (one for each side - see
fig. 60 ), to detect the presence of
vehicles (cars, trucks, motorbikes, etc.) in
the rear side blind spots of your vehicle.
60
06016V0001EM
The system warns the driver about the
presence of vehicles in the detection
area by lighting up the warning light on
the door mirror fig. 61 on the relevant
side and, where provided, by means of an
acoustic signal (if the relative item is
programmed on the Connect system).
The default setting is “Sound and
Display”.
61
06016V0002EM
When the engine is started the warning
light turns on to signal the driver that the
system is active.
Sensors
54)
The sensors are activated when any
forward gear is engaged at a speed
higher than about 6 mph (10 km/h), or
when reverse is engaged.
The sensors are temporarily deactivated
when the car is stationary and the P
(Park) mode active.
The detection area of the system covers
about a lane on both sides of the car
(around 10 ft (3 metres)).
This area begins from the door mirror and
extends for about 20 ft (6 metres)
towards the rear part of the car.
When the sensors are active the system
monitors the detection areas on both
sides of the car and warns the driver
about the possible presence of cars in
these areas.
While driving the system monitors the
detection area from three different input
points (side, rear and front) to check
whether a signal needs to be sent to the
driver. The system can detect the
presence of a vehicle in one of these
three areas.
IMPORTANT The system does not signal
the presence of fixed object (e.g. safety
barriers, poles, walls, etc.). However, in
some circumstances, the system may
activate in the presence of these objects.
This is normal and does not indicate a
system malfunction.
IMPORTANT The system does not warn
the driver about the presence of vehicles
coming from the opposite direction, in
the adjacent lanes.
Important notes
If a trailer is hitched to the vehicle, the
system automatically deactivates.
For the system to operate correctly, the
rear bumper area where the radar
sensors are located must stay free from
snow, ice and dirt gathered from the road
surface.
Do not cover the rear bumper area where
the radar sensors are located with any
object (e.g. adhesives, bike rack, etc.).
If, after purchasing the vehicle, you wish
to install the tow hook, you need to
deactivate the system via the Connect
system. To access the function, on the
main menu select the following items in
sequence: "Settings", "Safety" and "Blind
Spot Alert".
Rear view
The system detects cars coming from the
rear part of your car on both sides and
entering the rear detection area with a
difference in speed of less than 31 mph
(50 km/h) with respect to your car.
Overtaking vehicles
If another vehicle is overtaken slowly
(with a difference in speed of less than
about 15.5 mph (25 km/h) and this stays
in the blind spot for about 1.5 seconds,
the warning light on the door mirror of
the corresponding side lights up.
If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than about
15.5 mph (25 km/h), the warning light
does not light up.
77
SAFETY
RCP (Rear Cross Path detection) system
This system helps the driver during
reverse manoeuvres in the case of
reduced visibility.
The RCP system monitors the rear
detection areas on both sides of the car,
to detect objects moving towards the
sides of the car at a minimum speed
between about 0.6 mph and 2 mph
(1 km/h and 3 km/h) and objects moving
at a maximum speed of 22 mph
(35 km/h), as generally happens in
parking areas.
The system activation is signalled to the
driver by means of a visual and acoustic
warning.
IMPORTANT If the sensors are covered
by objects or vehicles, the system will not
warn the driver.
Operating mode
The system may be activated/
deactivated via the Connect system. To
access the function, on the main menu
select the following items in sequence:
"Settings", "Safety" and "Blind Spot
Alert".
78
"Blind spot alert", "Visual" mode
When the system is enabled, a visual
warning is sent to the door mirror on the
side of the detected object.
The visual warning on the mirror will blink
if the driver switches on the direction
indicators, thus indicating the intention
to change lane.
The warning will be fixed if the driver
stays on the same lane.
62
06016V0003EM
63
06016V0004EM
"Blind spot alert" function deactivation
When the system is deactivated ("Blind
Spot Alert" mode at "OFF"), the BSM or
RCP systems will not emit neither
acoustic warnings.
The BSM system will store the operating
mode running when the engine was
stopped. Each time the engine is started,
the operating mode stored previously will
be recalled and used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
SYSTEM
54) 55) 56) 57) 58)
19) 20) 21) 22) 23) 24) 25) 26) 27)
This is a driving assistance system
composed of a radar located behind the
front bumper fig. 62 and a camera
located in the middle of the windscreen
fig. 63.
In the event of an imminent collision the
system intervenes by automatically
braking the car to prevent the impact or
reduce its effects.
The system provides the driver with
acoustic and visual signals through
specific messages on the instrument
panel display.
The acoustic and visual signals before the
system cuts in depend on the car speed.
No acoustic/visual signal is generated at
speeds slower than 30 km/h.
Acoustic/visual signal is generated at
speeds faster than 30 km/h, instead.
The system may lightly brake to warn the
driver if a possible frontal accident is
detected (limited braking). Signals and
limited braking are intended to allow the
driver to react promptly, in order to
prevent or reduce the effects of a
potential accident.
In situations with the risk of collision, if
the system detects no intervention by
the driver, it provides automatic braking
to help slow the car and mitigate the
potential frontal accident (automatic
braking). If intervention by the driver on
the brake pedal is detected but not
deemed sufficient, the system may
intervene in order to improve the
reaction of the braking system, therefore
reducing vehicle speed further
(additional assistance in braking stage).
The system will intervene automatically
in case of imminent collision or impact
against a pedestrian crossing the road
(speed under 31 mph (50 km/h)).
IMPORTANT For safety reasons, when
the car has stopped, the brake callipers
may remain blocked for about 2 seconds.
Make sure you press the brake pedal if
the vehicle moves slightly forwards.
Engagement/disengagement
The Forward Collision Warning system
can be deactivated (and then reactivated)
via the Connect system. To access the
function, on the main menu select the
following items in sequence: "Settings",
"Safety", "Forward Collision Warning" and
"Status".
The system can be deactivated even with
the ignition device ON.
IMPORTANT The system status can be
changed with vehicle at a standstill only.
Activation/deactivation
The Forward Collision Warning system is
activated whenever the engine is started
regardless of the Connect system
setting.
After deactivation, the system will not
warn the driver about a possible collision
with the vehicle ahead, regardless of the
setting selected with the Connect
system.
IMPORTANT Each time the engine is
started, the system is activated
regardless of where was when it was
previously switched off.
This function is not active at a speed
lower than 4.3 mph (7 km/h) or higher
than 124 mph (200 km/h).
The system is active when:
each time the engine is started;
is active (ON) in the Connect system;
the ignition device is at ON;
- the vehicle speed is between 4.3 and
124 mph (7 and 200 km/h);
the front seat belts are fastened.
Changing the system sensitivity
The sensitivity of the system can be
changed through the Connect system
menu, choosing from one of the following
three options: "Near", "Med" or "Far". See
the description in the Connect system
supplement for how to change the
settings.
The default option is "Med". With this
setting, the system warns the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front
when that vehicle is at a standard
distance, between that of the other two
settings.
With the system sensitivity set to "Far",
the system will warn the driver of a
possible accident with the vehicle in front
when that vehicle is at a greater distance,
thus providing the possibility of acting on
the brakes more lightly and gradually.
This setting provides the drivers with the
maximum possible reaction time to
prevent a potential accident.
With the option set to "Near", the system
will warn the driver of a possible accident
with the vehicle in front when that vehicle
is close. This setting offers the driver a
lower reaction time compared to the
79
SAFETY
"Med" and "Far" settings, in the event of a
potential accident, but permits more
dynamic driving of the car.
The system sensitivity setting is kept in
the memory when the engine is switched
off.
System limited operation warning
If the dedicated message is displayed, a
condition limiting the system operation
may have occurred. The possible reasons
of this limitation are something blocking
the camera view or a fault.
In this condition it will still be possible to
drive the car normally, but automatic
braking will not be available in the event
of an impending collision.
If an obstruction is signalled, clean the
area of the windscreen shown in fig. 63.
When the conditions limiting the system
functions end, this will go back to normal
and complete operation. Should the fault
persist, contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
System failure warning
If the system switches off and a
dedicated message is shown on the
display, it means that there is a fault on
the system.
In this case, it is still possible to drive the
car, but you are advised to contact an
Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as
possible.
80
Radar warning not available
If conditions are such that the radar
cannot detect obstacles correctly, the
system is deactivated and a dedicated
message appears on the display. This
generally occurs in the event of poor
visibility, such as when it is snowing or
raining heavily.
The system can also be temporarily
dimmed due to obstructions such as mud,
dirt or ice on the bumper. In such cases, a
dedicated message will be shown on the
display and the system will be
deactivated. This message can
sometimes appear in conditions of high
reflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflective
tiles or ice or snow). When the conditions
limiting the system functions end, this
will go back to normal and complete
operation.
In certain particular cases, this dedicated
message could be displayed when the
radar is not detecting any vehicles or
objects within its view range.
If atmospheric conditions are not the real
reason behind this message, check if the
sensor is dirty. It may be necessary to
clean or remove any obstructions in the
area shown in fig. 62.
If the message appears often, even in the
absence of atmospheric conditions such
as snow, rain, mud or other obstructions,
contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership for a
sensor alignment check.
In the absence of visible obstructions,
cleaning the radar surface, by manually
removing the decorative cover trim,
could be required. Have this operation
performed at an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
IMPORTANT It is recommended that you
do not install devices, accessories or
aerodynamic attachments in front of the
sensor or darken it in any way, as this can
compromise the correct functioning of
the system.
Frontal collision alarm with active
braking
(where provided)
If this function is selected, the brakes are
operated to reduce the speed of the car
in the event of potential frontal impact.
This function applies an additional
braking pressure if the braking pressure
applied by the driver does not suffice to
prevent potential frontal impact.
The function is active with speed above
4.3 mph (7 km/h).
Driving in special conditions
In certain driving conditions, such as, for
example:
driving close to a bend;
the vehicle ahead is leaving a
roundabout;
vehicles with small dimensions and/or
not aligned in the driving lane;
lane change by other vehicles;
vehicles travelling at right angles to
the vehicle.
system intervention might be
unexpected or delayed. The driver must
therefore be very careful, keeping
control of the vehicle to drive in complete
safety.
The vehicle ahead is leaving a
roundabout.
On a roundabout, the system could
intervene when it detects a vehicle ahead
that is leaving the roundabout fig. 65.
66
IMPORTANT In particularly complex
traffic conditions, the driver can
deactivate the system manually through
the Connect system.
Driving close to a bend
When entering or leaving a wide bend, the
system may detect a vehicle that is in
front of you, but that is not driving in the
same lane fig. 64. In cases such as these,
the system may intervene.
65
06016V0010EM
Lane change by other vehicles
Vehicles suddenly changing lane to enter
the same lane as your car within the
operating range of the radar sensor, may
cause the system to intervene fig. 67.
Vehicles with small dimensions and/or
not aligned in the driving lane
The system cannot detect vehicles in
front of the car if they are outside the
range of the radar sensor or may not
react to small vehicles, such as bicycles
or motorcycles fig. 66.
67
64
06016V0006EM
06016V0007EM
06016V0005EM
81
SAFETY
Vehicles travelling at right angles to
the vehicle
The system could temporarily react to a
vehicle that is passing at right angles
through the radar sensor’s operating
range fig. 68.
68
06016V0008EM
Important notes
The system has not been designed to
prevent impacts and cannot detect
possible conditions leading to an
accident in advance. Failure to take into
account this warning may lead to serious
or fatal injuries.
The system may be activated,
assessing the trajectory of the car, in
case of reflecting metal objects different
from other cars, such as safety barriers,
road signs, barriers before parking lots,
tollgates, level crossings, gates, railways,
objects near road constructions sites or
higher than the car (e.g. a flyover). In the
same way, the system may intervene
82
inside multi-storey car parks or tunnels,
or due to a glare on the road surface.
These possible activations are a
consequence of the real driving scenario
coverage by the system and must not be
regarded as faults.
The system has been designed for
road use only. If the vehicle is driven on a
track, the system must be deactivated to
avoid unnecessary warnings. Automatic
deactivation is signalled by the dedicated
warning light/symbol switching on in the
instrument panel (see the instructions in
the "Warning lights and messages"
paragraph, "Knowing the instrument
panel" chapter).
TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System)
59) 60) 61) 62) 63) 64) 65)
28)
The car is equipped with Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS), which can
advise the driver in the event of
insufficient tyre pressure on the basis of
the pressure when cold indicated in the
"Technical specifications" chapter.
The system consists of a radio-frequency
transmitter sensor fitted to each wheel
(on the rim inside the tyre), which can
send information on the inflation
pressure of each tyre to the control unit
fig. 69.
69
06016S0009EM
Inflation pressure varies in relation to
temperature by about 1 psi (0.07) bar
every 43.7 °F (6.5 °C). This means that
when the outdoor temperature falls, the
tyre pressure decreases. Always adjust
the tyre inflation pressure when cold.
This is defined as the tyre pressure after
at least 3 hours of vehicle inactivity or
travel of less than 1mile (1.6 km) after
the 3 hour interval.
The cold tyre inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum pressure indicated
on the shoulder of the tyre: for further
details see the instructions in the "Rims
and tyres" paragraph, in the "Technical
data" chapter.
Tyre pressure increases when the car is
driven. This is normal, and no adjustment
of the pressure is required.
The TPMS signals the driver a possible
insufficient pressure if this falls below
the warning limit for any reason, including
the effects of low temperature and
normal loss of pressure from the tyre.
The TPMS will stop indicating insufficient
tyre pressure when it is equal to or
greater than the prescribed cold inflation
pressure. Therefore, if insufficient tyre
warning light
pressure is indicated (
on instrument panel on), increase the
inflation pressure up to the prescribed
cold inflation value.
The system automatically updates and
switches off each time
warning light
the system receives the updated
inflation pressures. The vehicle might
need to be driven at a speed higher than
about 15.5 mph (25 km/h) up to
20 minutes for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Operating example
Supposing that the prescribed cold
inflation pressure (i.e. vehicle stationary
for at least 3 hours) is 33.4 psi (2.3 bar),
if the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the detected tyre pressure is
28.3 psi (1.95 bar), a temperature
reduction of 19.4°F (−7°C) results in a
decrease in tyre pressure, bringing it to
approximately 24 psi (1.65 bar). This
pressure is sufficiently low to activate
warning light.
the
Heating of tyres due to driving the
vehicle may increase tyre pressure up to
approximately 28.3 psi (1.95 bar), but
warning light will stay on. In this
the
situation, the warning light will switch off
only after the tyres are inflated to the
prescribed cold pressure value for the
car.
IMPORTANT The TPMS is designed for
original tyres and wheels. The prescribed
pressures and consequent alarm
thresholds set in the TPMS are based on
the dimensions of the tyres fitted on the
vehicle. Using spare wheels of a size, type
and/or design different from the original
ones may cause an irregular operation of
the system and damage the sensors.
Aftermarket fitted wheels may damage
the sensors. Using aftermarket tyre
sealants may damage the Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor. If
aftermarket tyre sealant is used it is
recommended to go to an Alfa Romeo
Dealership to have the sensors checked.
After checking or adjusting the tyre
inflation pressure, always refit the valve
cap to prevent humidity and dirt from
entering, these may damage the Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System sensor.
LOW TYRE PRESSURE WARNING
If an insufficient pressure value is
detected on one or more tyres, the
warning light on the instrument panel
switches on and the dedicated messages
are shown on the display. The system also
highlights the tyre or tyres with
insufficient pressure graphically. An
acoustic warning is also emitted.
In this case, stop the car, check the
inflation pressure of each tyre and inflate
them to the correct cold inflation
pressure value, shown on the display or in
the dedicated TPMS menu.
TPMS TEMPORARILY DISABLED
TPMS check message
If a system failure is present, the
warning light flashes for about
75 seconds and then stays on solid. An
acoustic warning is also emitted.
A dedicated message and dashes "– –"
instead of the pressure value are shown
on the display, to indicate that detection
is impossible.
When the ignition device is set to STOP
and then back to ON, the indication
sequence repeats provided that the
failure is still resent.
warning light switches off when
The
the failure condition disappears and the
pressure value is displayed again in place
of the dashes.
A fault in the system could occur in the
following cases:
intense radio-frequency interference
may prevent the correct operation of the
TPMS. This condition will be indicated by
a dedicated message on the display. The
83
SAFETY
warning will disappear automatically as
soon as the radio-frequency interference
ceases to affect the system;
aftermarket application of coloured
films on the windows that interfere with
the radio waves emitted by the TPMS;
accumulation of layers of snow or ice
on the wheels or the wheel arches;
using snow chains;
use of rim/tyre assemblies without
sensors for TPMS;
After the punctured tyre has been
repaired with the original tyre sealant
contained in the TireKit, the previous
condition must be restored, so that the
warning light is off during normal
driving.
Deactivating TPMS messages
(for markets where provided)
When replacing the standard wheels with
others that do not have TPMS sensors
(for example when substituting the
rim/tyre assembly for the winter season)
and depending on the country of sale, the
messages only can be disabled
automatically at the next start-up after
the fault.
The TPMS will emit an acoustic warning,
warning light will flash for about
the
75 seconds, then it will stay on
continuously and the instrument panel
will display the "TPMS check" message
84
with dashes (– –) instead of the pressure
values on the Connect system display.
From the following ignition cycle, the
TPMS will not emit any acoustic warning
and the display will not show the
message "TPMS check", but the dashes
will be still displayed instead of the
pressure value.
The system will only resume normal
operation when all the pressure sensors
have been detected again.
IMPORTANT If wheels without pressure
sensors (e.g. wheels with winter tyres)
have been installed on the vehicle and the
standard wheels (with sensors) are
stored close the vehicle, the system
could detect the pressures of the latter
and consequently display the fault cycle
again once its has left the sensitive area.
WARNING
54) The system is an aid for vehicle driving,
it DOES NOT warn the driver about incoming
vehicles outside of the detection areas. The
driver must always maintain a sufficient
level of attention to the traffic and road
conditions and for controlling the trajectory
of the vehicle.
55) The system is an aid for the driver, who
must always pay full attention while driving.
The responsibility always rests with the
driver, who must take into account the
traffic conditions in order to drive in
complete safety. The driver must always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in
front.
56) If the driver depresses the brake pedal
fully or carries out a fast steering during
system operation, the automatic braking
function may stop (e.g. to allow a possible
manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle).
57) The system intervenes on vehicles
travelling in the same lane. People, animals
and things (e.g. pushchairs) are not taken
into consideration.
58) If the car must be placed on a roller
bench for maintenance interventions or if it
is washed in an automatic roller washing
tunnel with an obstacle in the front part (e.g.
another car, a wall or another obstacle), the
system may detect its presence and
activate. In this case the system must be
deactivated through the settings of the
Connect system.
59) The presence of the TPMS does not
permit the driver to neglect regular checks
of the tyre pressure, including for the spare
tyre, and correct maintenance: the system is
not used to signalling a possible tyre fault.
60) Tyre pressure must be checked with
tyres rested and cold. Should it become
necessary for whatever reason to check
pressure with warm tyres, do not reduce
pressure even though it is higher than the
prescribed value. Repeat the check when the
tyres are cold.
61) Should one or more wheels be fitted
without sensors, the system will no longer be
available and a warning message will be
shown on the display, until wheels with
sensors are fitted again.
62) The TPMS cannot indicate sudden tyre
pressure drops (e.g. if a tyre bursts). In this
case, stop the vehicle, braking with caution
and avoiding abrupt steering.
63) Changes in outside temperature may
cause tyre pressures to vary. The system
may temporarily indicate insufficient
pressure. In this case, check the tyre
pressure when cold and, if necessary,
restore the inflation values.
64) Replacing standard tyres with winter
tyres and vice versa requires TPMS system
adjustment that must only be performed by
Alfa Romeo Dealerships.
65) When a tyre is removed, it is advisable
to replace the rubber valve seal as well:
contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership. The
fitting/removal of the tyres and/or rims
require special care. To avoid damaging or
fitting the sensors incorrectly, tyre and/or
rim fitting/removal operations should only
be carried out by specialised staff. Contact
an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
IMPORTANT
19) The system may have limited or absent
operation due to weather conditions such as:
heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow.
20) The section of the bumper before the
sensor must not be covered with adhesives,
auxiliary headlights or any other object.
21) System intervention might be
unexpected or delayed when other vehicles
transport loads projecting from the side,
above or from the rear, with respect to the
normal size of the vehicle.
22) Operation can be adversely affected by
any structural change made to the vehicle,
such as a modification to the front geometry,
tyre change, or a heavier load than the
standard load of the vehicle.
23) Incorrect repairs made on the front part
of the vehicle (e.g. bumper, chassis) may alter
the position of the radar sensor, and
adversely affect its operation. Go to an Alfa
Romeo Dealership for any operation of this
type.
24) Do not tamper with nor carry out any
intervention on the radar sensor or on the
camera on the windscreen. In the event of a
sensor failure, contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
25) Do not wash with high-pressure jets in
the bumper lower area: in particular do not
operate on the system's electrical connector.
26) Be careful in the case of repairs and new
paintings in the area around the sensor
(panel covering the sensor on the left side of
the bumper). In the event of a frontal impact
the sensor may automatically deactivate
and display a warning to indicate that the
sensor needs to be repaired. Even without a
malfunction warning, deactivate the system
operation if you think that the position of the
radar sensor has changed (e.g. due to
low-speed frontal impact as during parking
manoeuvres). In these cases, go to an Alfa
Romeo Dealership to have the radar sensor
realigned or replaced.
27) When towing a trailer, a vehicle or during
loading manoeuvres on a vehicle transporter
(or in vehicle for transport), the system must
be deactivated via the Connect system.
28) The Tire Repair Kit, provided with the
vehicle, is compatible with the TPMS
sensors. Using sealants different from that
in the original kit may compromise its
operation. If sealants not equivalent with the
original ones are used, it is recommended to
have the TPMS sensor operation checked by
a qualified repair centre.
85
SAFETY
OCCUPANT PROTECTION
SYSTEMS
The following protection systems are
among the vehicle’s most important
safety equipment:
seat belts;
SBA (Seat Belt Alert) system;
head restraints;
child restraint systems;
Front airbags and side bags.
Read the information given the following
pages with the utmost care. It is of
fundamental importance that the
protection systems are used in the
correct way to guarantee the maximum
possible safety level for the driver and
the passengers.
For the description of the head restraint
adjustment see the "Head restraints"
paragraph in the "Knowing your vehicle"
chapter.
SEAT BELTS
All the seat belts have three anchor
points and a retractor.
The retractor mechanism operates
locking the belt in the event of sharp
braking or strong deceleration due to an
impact. This allows the belt strap to slide
freely and to adapt to the body of the
occupant. In the event of an accident, the
belt will lock reducing the risk of impact
inside the passenger compartment and
of being projected outside the vehicle.
The driver is responsible for respecting,
and ensuring that all the other occupants
of the vehicle also respect, the local laws
in force in relation to the use of the seat
belts.
Always fasten the seat belts before
setting off.
USING THE SEAT BELTS
The seat belt should be worn keeping the
chest straight and rested against the
backrest.
To fasten the seat belts, hold the tongue
1 fig. 70 and insert it into the buckle 2,
until it clicks into place.
86
70
06056V0001EM
On removal of the belt, if it jams, let it
rewind for a short stretch, then pull it out
again without jerking.
To unfasten the seat belts, press button
3 and guide the seat belt with your hand
while it is rewinding, to prevent it from
twisting.
66)
The retractor may lock when the vehicle
is parked on a steep slope: this is
perfectly normal. Furthermore, the reel
mechanism locks the belt if it is pulled
sharply or in the event of sudden braking,
collisions and high-speed bends.
Wear the rear seat belts as shown in
fig. 71 and fig. 72.
71
06056V0005EM
72
06056S0003EM
ADJUSTING THE SEAT BELT HEIGHT
Four different adjustments in height are
possible.
To adjust the window height, from the top
downwards, press the button 4
fig. 73 and slide the handle downwards.
The height adjuster moves upwards even
without pressing the button.
Always adjust the height of the seat belts
to fit the person wearing it: this
precaution could greatly reduce the risk
of injury in the event of collision.
Correct adjustment is obtained when the
belt passes approximately half way
between the shoulder and the neck.
WARNING
66) Never press button 3 when travelling.
67) Remember that, in the event of an
accident, the rear seat passengers not
wearing seat belts are exposed to a very
serious risk and also represent a serious
danger for the front seat occupants.
68) Make height adjustment of the seat
belts when the car is stationary.
69) After height adjustment, always check
that the cursor to which the ring is fastened
is locked in one of the preset positions. To do
this, with the adjustment button released,
exert further pressure downwards to allow
the locking device to click if the grip has not
been released in one of the possible
positions.
67)
73
06056V0002EM
68) 69)
87
SAFETY
SBA (Seat Belt Alert) SYSTEM
The SBR system warns the passengers of
the front and rear (where provided) seats
if their seat belt is not fastened.
The system warnings unfastened seat
belts with visual warnings (warning lights
on in the instrument panel and icons on
the display) and an acoustic warning (see
the following paragraphs).
FRONT SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT
BEHAVIOUR
When the ignition device is turned to ON,
(see fig. 74 ) comes on
warning light
for a few seconds, regardless of the
status of the front seat belts.
With car at a standstill, if the driver side
seat belt or the passenger side seat belt
(with occupant seated) is unfastened, the
warning light stays on constantly.
74
06066S0001EM
As soon as the threshold of 5 mph
88
(8 km/h) is exceeded for a few seconds
(variable according to the vehicle
conditions) with driver or passenger side
(with passenger seated) seat belts
unfastened, an acoustic warning is
activated together with the flashing of
warning light for approximately
the
105 seconds.
When this cycle of warnings is activated
it will stay on for its entire length
(regardless of the car speed) or until the
seat belts are fastened again.
When the reverse is engaged, during the
cycle of warnings, the acoustic warning is
warning light
deactivated and the
turns on constantly. The cycle of
warnings will be reactivated as soon as
the speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h) again.
REAR SEAT BELT ICON BEHAVIOUR
(where provided)
The icons are shown on the display
fig. 75 after a few seconds have elapsed
since the ignition device is turned to ON
and disappear after approximately
30 seconds.
After a door closes, or following a change
in belt fastening status, the icons are
shown again for approximately
30 seconds before disappearing.
The icons shown on the display indicate:
1 - rear left seat belt;
2 - rear central seat belt (where
provided);
3 - rear right seat belt.
75
06066S0002EM
The icons are displayed according to the
corresponding seat belts in the rear
seats, and stay on for about 30 seconds
from the last seat belt status change:
if the seat belt is fastened the
corresponding icon will be green;
if the seat belt is unfastened the
corresponding icon will be red.
If a rear seat belt is unfastened, an
acoustic warning (3 "beeps") will be
activated along with the relevant icon
lighting up in the display.
Furthermore the icons will light up again
for 30 seconds each time one of the rear
doors is closed.
The visual indication (flashing red) will
start and stop independently for each
warning light if several seat belts are
unfastened.
The icon will turn green after the
corresponding seat belt has been
fastened.
The rear seat icons will go out, regardless
of the state of the belt (red icon or green
icon), approximately 30 seconds after
the last signal.
IMPORTANT NOTES
As far as the rear seats are concerned,
the SBR system will only indicate
whether the seat belts are unfastened
(red icon) or fastened (green icon), not
the presence of any passengers.
The warning lights/icons all stay off if all
seat belts (front and rear) are fastened
when the ignition device is set to ON.
For the rear seats, the icons will activate
a few seconds after the ignition device
has been turned to ON, regardless of the
status of the seat belts (even if the seat
belts are all fastened).
All the warning lights/icons will come on
when at least one belt changes from
fastened to unfastened status or vice
versa.
PRE-TENSIONERS
The car is equipped with front and rear
lateral seat belt pretensioners, which
draw back the seat belts by several
centimetres in the event of a strong
frontal impact. This guarantees the
perfect adherence of the seat belts to
the occupant's bodies before the
retention action begins.
It is evident that the pretensioners have
been activated when the belt withdraws
toward the retractor.
This car is also equipped with a second
pretensioner on the front seat belts
(fitted in the kick plate area). Its
activation is signalled by the shortening
of the metal cable.
A slight discharge of smoke may be
produced during the activation of the
pretensioner which is not harmful and
does not involve any fire hazard.
The pretensioner does not require any
maintenance or lubrication: any changes
to its original conditions will invalidate its
efficiency.
If, due to unusual natural events (floods,
sea storms, etc.), the device has been
affected by water and/or mud, contact an
Alfa Romeo Dealership to have it
replaced.
IMPORTANT To obtain the highest
degree of protection from the action of
the pretensioner, wear the seat belt tight
to the torso and pelvis.
LOAD LIMITERS
70)
29)
To increase safety in the event of an
accident, the front and rear lateral seat
belt retractors contain a load limiter
which controls the force acting on the
chest and shoulders during the belt
restraining action in the event of a
head-on collision.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR USING
THE SEAT BELTS
71) 72) 73)
Respect and ensure that all the other
occupants of the vehicle comply with the
local laws in force regarding the use of
seat belts. Always fasten the seat belts
before setting off.
Seat belts must also be worn by pregnant
women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for them and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat
belt.
Pregnant women must position the lower
part of the belt very low down so that it
passes over the pelvis and under the
abdomen fig. 76. While pregnancy
progresses, the driver must adjust both
seat and steering wheel to have full
control over the vehicle (pedals and
89
SAFETY
SEAT BELTS MAINTENANCE
steering wheel must be easy to access).
The maximum clearance should be kept
between the abdomen and the steering
wheel.
77
76
06076S0001EM
The seat belt must not be twisted. The
upper part must pass over the shoulder
and cross the chest diagonally. The lower
part must adhere to the pelvis fig. 77, not
to the abdomen of the occupant. Never
use devices (clips, clamps, etc.) that hold
the seat belt away from your body.
Each seat belt must be used by only one
person. Never travel with a child sitting
on the passenger's lap and a single belt to
protect them both fig. 78. In general, do
not place any objects between the person
and the belt.
WARNING
78
90
06076S0002EM
For keeping the seat belts in efficient
conditions, carefully observe the
following warnings:
always use the seat belt well
stretched and never twisted; make sure
that it is free to run without obstructions;
check seat belt operation as follows:
attach the seat belt and pull it hard;
replace the belt after an accident of a
certain severity even if it does not appear
to be damaged. Always replace the seat
belt if the pretensioners were deployed;
prevent the retractors from getting
wet: their correct operation is only
guaranteed if water does not get inside;
replace the seat belt when it shows
wear or cuts.
06076S0003EM
70) The pretensioner may be used only once.
After its activation, contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership to have it replaced.
71) Removing or otherwise tampering with
pretensioner and seat belt components is
strictly prohibited. Any intervention on these
components must be performed by qualified
and authorised technicians. Always contact
an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
72) For maximum safety, keep the backrest
upright, lean back into it and make sure the
seat belt fits closely across your chest and
pelvis. Always fasten the seat belts for both
the front and rear seats! Travelling without
wearing seat belts will increase the risk of
serious injury and even death in the event of
an accident.
73) If the belt has been subjected to high
levels of stress, for example after an
accident, it should be changed completely
together with the attachments, attachment
fixing screws and the pretensioner. In fact,
even if the belt has no visible defects, it may
have lost its resilience.
IMPORTANT
29) Operations which lead to impacts,
vibrations or localised heating (over 100°C
for a maximum of six hours) in the area
around the pretensioner may cause damage
or make it deploy. Contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership should intervention be necessary
on these components.
CHILD PROTECTION SYSTEMS
CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY
74) 75) 76) 77)
For optimal protection in the event of an
impact, all occupants must be seated and
wearing adequate restraint systems,
including newborn and other children!
This prescription is compulsory in all EC
countries according to EC Directive
2003/20/EC.
Children below the height of 4.9 ft
(1.50 metres) and up to 12 years must be
protected with suitable restraint
systems and be seated on the rear seats.
Statistics on accidents indicate that the
rear seats offer greater safety for
children.
Compared with an adult, a child's head is
larger and heavier in proportion to their
body and the child's muscular and bone
structures are not fully developed.
Therefore, correct restraint systems
other than adult seat belts are necessary,
to reduce as much as possible the risk of
injuries in the event of an accident,
braking or sudden manoeuvre.
Children must be seated safely and
comfortably. As far as the characteristics
of the child seats used allow, you are
advised to keep children in rear facing
child seats for as long as possible (at
least until 3–4 years old), since this is the
most protected position in the event of
an impact.
The choice of the most suitable child
restraint system depends on the weight
and size of the child. There are various
types of child restraint systems, which
can be secured to the car by means of the
seat belts or with the ISOFIX/i-Size
anchorages.
It is recommended to always choose the
restraint system most suitable for the
child; for this reason always refer to the
Owner Handbook provided with the child
restraint system, to be sure that it is of
the right type for the children it is
intended for.
In Europe the characteristics of child
restraint systems are ruled by the
regulation ECE-R44, dividing them into
five weight groups:
Group
Weight range
Group 0
up to 22 lb (10 kg) in
weight
Group 0+
up to 28.7 lb (13 kg)
in weight
Group 1
20 - 40 lb (9 - 18 kg)
in weight
Group 2
33 - 55 lb (15 - 25 kg)
in weight
91
SAFETY
Group
Group 3
Weight range
48.5 - 79.4 lb (22 36 kg) in weight
The ECE-R44 standard was recently
paired with the ECE R-129 regulation,
which defines the characteristics of the
new i-Size child restraint systems (see
the "Suitability of passenger seats for
i-Size child restraint system use"
paragraph for more information).
All restraint devices must bear the
type-approval data, together with the
control mark, on a label solidly fixed to
the child restraint system which must
never be removed.
Lineaccessori includes child restraint
systems for each weight group. These
devices are recommended having been
specifically tested for Alfa Romeo cars.
INSTALLING A CHILD CARSEAT WITH
SEATBELTS
78) 79) 80) 81)
The Universal child restraint systems
installed with the seat belts only are
type-approved on the basis of the ECE
R44 standard and are divided into
various weight groups.
Group 1
From 20 to 40 lb (9 to 18 kg), children
can be transported facing forward
fig. 80.
IMPORTANT The figures are indicative
and provided for assembly purposes
only. Fit the child restraint system
according to the instructions, which must
be included.
Group 0 and 0+
Babies up to 28.7 lb (13 kg) must be
carried with a rear facing child restraint
system of a type as shown in
fig. 79 which, supporting the head, does
not induce stress on the neck in the event
of sudden decelerations.
IMPORTANT For correct installation on
the car, some universal child restraint
systems require an accessory (base) sold
separately by the restraint system's
producer. Therefore, FCA advises
customers to check that their chosen
child restraint system can be installed on
their vehicle by performing a trial
installation, on the vendor's premises,
before purchase.
79
92
The child restraint system is secured by
the vehicle seat belts, as shown in
fig. 79 and it must restrain the child in
turn with its own belts.
06086V0001EM
80
06086V0002EM
Group 2
Children from 33 to 55 lb (15 to 25 kg)
can be held directly by the car's seatbelts
fig. 81.
81
Group 3
For children from 48.5 to 79.4 lb (22 to
36 kg), there are restraining devices that
allow the seatbelts to pass through
properly.
The fig. 82 shows the correct child
positioning on the rear seat.
The fig. 82 shows the correct child
positioning on the rear seat.
06086V0003EM
In this case, the child restraint system is
used to position the child correctly with
respect to the seat belts so that the
diagonal belt section crosses the child’s
chest and not the neck, and the lower part
is snug on the pelvis not the abdomen.
82
06086V0004EM
Children over 4.9 ft (1.50 m) tall wear
seatbelts like adults.
93
SAFETY
PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON UNIVERSAL CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM USE
The car complies with European Directive 2000/3/EC which governs the arrangement possibilities for child restraint systems on the
various seats of the car as shown in the following table:
Positioning the “Universal” child restraint system
Front passenger
Group
Weight range
Passenger airbags
on
Rear passengers
Passenger airbags
off
Rear central passenger
(where provided)
Rear side
passengers
Group 0
up to 22 lb (10 kg)
X
U
U
U
Group 0+
up to 26.7 lb (13 kg)
X
U
U
U
Group 1
20 - 40 lb (9-18 kg)
X
U
U
U
Group 2
33 - 55 lb (15-25 kg)
U
U
U
U
Group 3
48.5 - 79.4 lb
(22-36 kg)
U
U
U
U
X = Restraint system not suitable for children in this weight category.
U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to European Standard EEC-R44 for the specified
“Groups”.
94
INSTALLING AN ISOFIX CHILD CARSEAT
82) 83) 84) 85) 86)
The rear side seats of the vehicle are
equipped with ISOFIX attachments, for
fitting child restraint systems quickly,
simply and safely.
The ISOFIX system lets you install the
ISOFIX child restraining system without
using the car seat belts but connecting
them directly to the carseat with three
anchors in the car.
Traditional child restraint systems can be
fitted alongside ISOFIX child restraint
systems on different seats in the same
vehicle.
To install an ISOFIX child restraint
system, attach it to the two metal
anchors fig. 83. They can be reached by
lifting the flaps 2 located behind the rear
seat cushion, at the point where it meets
the backrest. Then fix the upper hook
(available with the child restraint system)
to the dedicated "top tether" anchor
fig. 84 located behind the seat backrest.
83
84
06086V0009EM
06086V0005EM
85
06086V0006EM
NOTE When a Universal ISOFIX child
restraint system is used, only ECE R44
"ISOFIX Universal” (R44/03 or further
upgrades), type-approved child restraint
systems can be used (see fig. 86 ).
The other weight groups are covered by
specific ISOFIX child restraint systems,
which can be used only if specifically
tested for this vehicle (see list of vehicles
provided with the child restraint system).
As an example, fig. 85 shows a Universal
Isofix child restraint system for weight
group 1.
IMPORTANT The fig. 85 is indicative and
for assembly purposes only. Fit the child
restraint system according to the
instructions, which must be included.
86
06086S0007EM
95
SAFETY
SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM USE
ISOFIX POSITIONS ON THE VEHICLE
Weight categories
Group 0 (up to 22 lb
(10 kg))
Size category
Device
Front passenger
Rear side
passengers
Rear central
passenger (where
provided)
E
ISO/R1
X
IL
X
E
ISO/R1
X
IL
X
D
ISO/R2
X
IL
X
C
ISO/R3
X
IL IL (*)
X
D
ISO/R2
X
IL
X
C
ISO/R3
X
IL IL (*)
X
B
ISO/F2
X
IUF –IL
X
B1
ISO/F2X
X
IUF –IL
X
A
ISO/F3
X
IUF –IL
X
Group 2 (from 33 to
55 lb (from 15 kg to
25 kg))
X
IL
X
Group 3 (from 48.5 to
79.4 lb (from 22 kg to
36 kg))
X
IL
X
Group 0+ (up to 28.7 lb
(13 kg))
Group 1 (from 20 to
40 lb (from 9 kg to
18 kg))
X ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child protection systems for this weight and/or size category.
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Specific for the vehicle", "Restricted", or "Semiuniversal" categories, approved for this type of vehicle.
IL (*) Only for Quadrifoglio versions. It is possible to install the ISOFIX child restraint system by adjusting the front seat (adjustment is not required if the "Sparco"
Carbonshell Sport seats are installed).
IUF Suitable for forward facing ISOFIX child restraint systems in the Universal category and type-approved for the use in the weight group.
96
The rear side seats of the car are
type-approved to house the
state-of-the-art i-Size child restraint
systems.
These child restraint systems, built and
type-approved according to the i-Size
(ECE R129) standard, ensure better
safety conditions to carry children on
board a vehicle:
the child must be transported
rearward facing until 15 months;
child restraint system protection is
increased in the event of a side collision;
the use of the ISOFIX system is
promoted to avoid faulty installation of
the child restraint system;
efficiency in the choice of the child
restraint system, which isn't made
according to weight any more but
according to the child's height, is
increased;
compatibility between the vehicle
seats and the child restraint systems is
better: the i-Size child restraint systems
can be considered as "Super ISOFIX"; this
means that they can be perfectly fitted in
type-approved i-Size seats, but can also
be fitted in ISOFIX (ECE R44)
type-approved seats.
NOTE If your car seats are i-Size
approved, the symbol shown in fig. 87 will
appear on the seats near the ISOFIX
attachments.
87
06086S0008EM
NOTE: See the table shown on the
following page to check whether your car
is approved for installing i-Size child
restraint systems.
97
SAFETY
The following table, according to European standard ECE 129, indicates the possibility of i-Size child restraint system installation.
i-Size POSITIONS ON THE VEHICLE
Device
i-Size child restraint systems
Front passenger
Rear side
passengers
ISO/R2
X
i-U
X
ISO/F2
X
i-U
X
i-U: suitable for Universal i-Size child restraint systems, both rearward facing and forward facing.
X: seat not suitable for Universal i-Size child restraint systems.
98
Rear central
passenger
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS RECOMMENDED BY ALFA ROMEO FOR THE STELVIO
Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo includes a complete range of child restraint systems to be fixed using the seat belt with three anchorage
points or the ISOFIX anchorages.
IMPORTANT Alfa Romeo recommends fitting the child restraint system according to the instructions, which must be included.
Weight group
Child restraint system
Type of child restraint
system
PEG-PEREGO
Primo Viaggio SL
Group 0+: from
birth to 28.7 lb
(13 kg)
from 15.7 to 33.5 in
(from 40 to 85 cm)
Child restraint system installation
Universal/ISOFIX child restraint
system.
It must be installed rearward facing,
using the vehicle seat belts only, or
the dedicated ISOFIX K base (which
can be purchased separately) and the
vehicle ISOFIX anchorages.
Alfa Romeo recommends using the
specific ISOFIX K base (which can
be purchased separately) and the
ISOFIX anchorages of the vehicle to
install it.
With the base it must be fitted on the
rear outer seats.
99
SAFETY
Weight group
Child restraint system
Type of child restraint
system
Child restraint system installation
BeSafe iZi Modular iSize
Order code AR: 71808565
Group 0+ / 1: from
birth to 28.7 lb
(13 kg)
from 15.7 to 33.5 in
(from 40 to 85 cm)
+
+
BeSafe iZi Modular iSize
Base
Order code AR: 71808566
100
iSize type-approval child restraint
system which must be fitted on the
car with the iZi Modular iSize Base, to
be purchased separately. It can be
installed facing forwards or facing
backwards (refer to the child
restraint system manual).
Weight group
Group 2: from 33 to
55 lb (from 15 kg to
25 kg)
from 37.4 to 53 in
(from 95 to
135 cm)
Group 3: from
48.5 to 79.4 lb
(from 22 kg to
36 kg)
from 53.5 to 59 in
(from 136 to
150 cm)
Child restraint system
Type of child restraint
system
Child restraint system installation
Britax Römer KidFix XP
It can only be fitted facing forwards,
using the three-point seat belt and
the ISOFIX anchorages of the vehicle.
Alfa Romeo recommends to install it
using the ISOFIX anchorages of the
vehicle.
It must be fitted on the rear outer
seats.
Britax Römer KidFix XP
It can only be fitted facing forwards,
using the three-point seat belt and
the ISOFIX anchorages of the vehicle.
Alfa Romeo recommends to install it
using the ISOFIX anchorages of the
vehicle.
It must be fitted on the rear outer
seats.
101
SAFETY
Main recommendations to carry
children safely
Install the child restraint systems on
the rear seat, which is the most protected
position in the event of an impact.
Keep children in rearward facing child
restraint systems for as long as possible,
until 3–4 years old if possible.
The rear head restraint or the front
passenger head restraint can be lifted if
needed to install a child restraint system.
The head restraint must always be
present in the vehicle and fitted if the
seat is used by an adult passenger or a
child sitting in a restraint system without
backrest (refer to the procedure
described in ‘’Head restraint’’ paragraph,
‘’Knowing your vehicle’’ chapter).
If the front passenger airbag has been
deactivated, always check that the
warning light on the courtesy light is on
continuously to make sure that it is
effectively deactivated.
Carefully follow the instructions
supplied with the child restraint system.
Keep the instructions in the vehicle along
with the other documents and this
handbook. Do not use second-hand child
seats without instructions.
Only one child is to be strapped into
each restraint system; never carry two
children using one child restraint system.
Always check that the seat belts do
not rest on the child’s neck.
102
Always check that the seat belt is well
fastened by pulling on it.
While travelling, do not let the child sit
incorrectly or unfasten the belts.
Never allow a child to put the belt's
diagonal section under an arm or behind
their back.
Never carry children on your lap, even
newborns. No-one can hold a child in the
case of a crash.
In the event of an accident, replace the
child restraint system with a new one.
WARNING
74) SEVERE DANGER When a front
passenger airbag is fitted, do not install
rearward facing child restraint systems on
the front passenger seat. Deployment of the
airbag in an accident could cause fatal
injuries to the child regardless of the
severity of the collision. It is advisable to
always carry children in a child restraint
system on the rear seat, which is the most
protected position in the event of a collision.
75) On the sun visor there is a label with
suitable symbols reminding the user that it is
compulsory to deactivate the airbag if a
rearward facing child restraint system is
fitted. Always comply with the instructions
on the passenger side sun visor (see the
"Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) Airbag" paragraph).
76) Should it be necessary to carry a child on
the passenger side front seat in a rear facing
child restraint system, the passenger side
front airbag and side bag must be
deactivated through the Connect system
main menu (see the Supplementary
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag"
paragraph), verifying deactivation by
checking whether the
OFF LED has
illuminated on the front ceiling light. Move
the passenger's seat as far back as possible
to avoid contact between the child seat and
the dashboard.
77) Do not move the front or rear seat if a
child is seated on it or on the dedicated child
restraint system
78) Incorrect fitting of the child restraint
system may result in an inefficient
protection system. In the event of an
accident the child restraint system may
become loose and the child may be injured,
even fatally. When fitting a restraint system
for newborns or children, strictly comply
with the instructions provided by the
Manufacturer.
79) When the child restraint system is not
used, secure it with the seat belt or with the
ISOFIX anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it unsecured inside the
passenger compartment. In this way, in the
case of sudden braking or an accident, it will
not cause injuries to the occupants.
80) After installing a child restraint system,
do not move the seat: always remove the
child restraint system before making any
adjustment.
81) Always make sure that the chest section
of the seat belt does not pass under the
arms or behind the back of the child. In the
event of an accident the seat belt will not be
able to secure the child, with the risk of
injury, including fatal injury. Therefore the
child must always wear the seat belt
correctly.
82) Do not use the same lower anchorage to
install more than one child restraint system.
83) If a Universal ISOFIX child seat is not
fixed to all three anchorages, the child seat
will not be able to protect the child correctly.
In a crash, the child could be seriously or
fatally injured.
84) Fit the child restraint system when the
car is stationary. The child restraint system
is correctly fixed to the brackets when you
hear the click. Follow the instructions for
assembly, disassembly and positioning that
the Manufacturer must supply with the child
restraint system.
85) If the vehicle was involved in an accident
of a certain severity, have the ISOFIX
anchorages and the child restraint system
replaced.
86) If the vehicle was involved in an accident
of a certain severity, have both the child
restraint system and the seat belt it was
attached to replaced.
SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS) - AIRBAG
The vehicle is equipped with:
front driver airbag;
front passenger airbag;
driver and passenger front side bags
for pelvis, chest and shoulder protection
(Side bags);
side bags for head protection of front
seat passengers and rear side seat
passengers (window bag).
The location of the airbags on the vehicle
is marked by the word "AIRBAG" under
the Alfa Romeo emblem on the steering
wheel, on the dashboard, on the side trim
or on a label placed next to the airbag
deployment area.
FRONT AIRBAGS
The front (driver and passenger) airbags
protect the front seat occupants in the
event of head-on crashes of medium-high
severity, by placing the cushion between
the occupant and the steering wheel or
dashboard.
Therefore non-activation of airbags in
other types of collisions (side impacts,
rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) does not
indicate a system malfunction.
Driver and passenger front airbags are
not a replacement of but complementary
to the seat belts, which should always be
worn, as specified by law in Europe and
most non-European countries.
In the event of impact, those not wearing
a seat belt are projected forwards and
may come into contact with the bag
which is still inflating. The protection
offered by the bag is compromised in
these circumstances.
Front airbags may not activate in the
following situations:
frontal impacts against highly
deformable objects not involving the
front surface of the vehicle (e.g. wing
collision against guard rail, etc.);
vehicle wedging under other vehicles
or protective barriers (e.g. trucks or
guard rails).
Failure to activate in the conditions
described above is due to the fact that
103
SAFETY
they may not provide any additional
protection compared with seat belts, so
their activation would be inappropriate.
In these cases, non-deployment does not
indicate a system malfunction.
Passenger side front airbag
This consists of an instantly inflating bag
contained in a special recess in the
dashboard fig. 89. This bag has a larger
volume than that of the driver's.
Front airbag driver's side
This consists of an instantly inflating bag
contained in a special compartment in the
centre of the steering wheel fig. 88.
89
88
Passenger side front airbag and child
restraint systems
Rearward facing child restraint systems
must NEVER be fitted on the front seat
with an active passenger side airbag
since in the event of an impact the airbag
activation may cause fatal injuries to the
transported child.
ALWAYS comply with the instructions on
the label on the passenger side sun visor
fig. 90, and shown in table fig. 93.
06106V0002EM
06106V0001EM
90
104
06106V0003EM
Deactivating/activating the passenger
side airbags: front airbag and side bag
(where provided)
To deactivate the front and side
passenger side airbag, use the Connect
system. Select the following functions in
succession from the main Menu, and
activate them by pressing the MENU
fig. 91 button: “Settings", "Safety", "Front
Passenger Airbag". They can be selected
by turning and pressing the Rotary Pad.
The system informs you of the
activation/deactivation status of the
airbags and asks for confirmation of the
status change. Press the Rotary Pad if
you want to proceed.
91
05036V0040EM
On the dashboard are the ON and OFF
LED status. Moving the ignition device to
MAR, the two LEDs switch on for a few
seconds. If not, contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership. During the first seconds, the
activation of the LEDs does not actually
show the passenger protection status,
but only checks its correct operation.
After a test of a few seconds, the LEDs
will indicate the status of the passenger
airbag protection.
Passenger protection activated: the ON
LED fig. 92 switches on fixed.
Passenger protection deactivated: the
OFF LED turns on fixed.
92
06106S0008EM
105
SAFETY
Passenger side front airbag and child restraint systems: IMPORTANT
93
106
J0A0215
SIDE AIRBAGS
To help increase occupants protection in
the event of side impact collisions, the
vehicle is equipped with front side bags
and window bags.
Side bag
These consist of two bags located in the
front seat backrests fig. 94 that protect
the occupants’ pelvis, chest and shoulder
area in the event of a side impact of
medium/high severity.
They are marked by the "AIRBAG" label
sewn on the outer side of the front seats.
95
06106V0005EM
The deployment of side bags in the event
of side impacts of low severity is not
required.
In the event of a side impact, the system
provides best protection if the passenger
sits on the seat in a correct position,
allowing the window bag to inflate
correctly.
87) 88) 89) 90) 91) 92) 93) 94) 95) 96) 97) 98) 99) 100)
94
06106V0004EM
Window bag
This consists of a "curtain" bag housed
behind the roof side linings and covered
by special trims fig. 95.
They are designed to protect the head of
front and rear occupants in the event of a
side collision, thanks to the wide cushion
inflation surface.
Important notes
Do not wash the seats with water or
pressurised steam (wash by hand or at
automatic seat washing stations).
The front and/or side airbags may
activate in the event of sharp impacts to
the underbody of the vehicle (e.g. impact
with steps, pavements, potholes or road
bumps etc.).
When the airbag deploys it emits a small
amount of dust: the dust is harmless and
does not indicate the beginning of a fire.
The dust may irritate the skin and eyes
however: in this case, wash with neutral
soap and water.
Airbag checking, repair and replacement
must be carried out at an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
If the car is scrapped, have the airbag
system deactivated at an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
Pretensioners and airbags are deployed
in different ways on the basis of the type
of collision. Failure to activate one or
more of the devices does not indicate a
system malfunction.
WARNING
87) Do not apply stickers or other objects on
the steering wheel, on the dashboard in the
passenger side airbag area, on side
upholstery on the roof or on the seats. Never
put objects (e.g. mobile phones) on the
passenger side of the dashboard since they
could interfere with correct inflation of the
passenger airbag and also cause serious
injury to the passengers.
88) Always drive with your hands on the rim
of the steering wheel so that the airbag can
inflate freely if required. Do not drive with
your body bent forward. Keep your back
straight against the backrest.
89) The passenger airbag can be
deactivated on the Connect system by
selecting the following functions in sequence
on the main menu: “Settings”; “Safety”;
“Passenger airbag” and “Deactivation”.
107
SAFETY
90) Do not affix rigid objects to the garment
hooks or support handles.
91) Do not rest your head, arms or elbows on
the door, windows or the area in which the
Window bag is located to avoid possible
injury during airbag inflation.
92) Never lean your head, arms or elbows
out of the window.
93) If, when the ignition device is turned to
ON, the
warning light does not switch on
or stays on whilst driving, a fault may have
occurred in the restraint systems. In this
case the airbags or pretensioners may not
be deployed in an impact or, in a lower
number of cases, they may be deployed
accidentally. Before continuing, contact an
Alfa Romeo Dealership immediately to have
the system checked.
94) In case of a LED
OFF failure (located
on the front courtesy light), the
warning
light appears on the instrument panel.
95) On cars with side bags, do not cover the
front seat backrests with extra covers.
96) Do not travel carrying objects in your
lap, in front of your chest or between your
lips (pipe, pencils, etc.): they could cause
severe injury if the airbag is deployed.
97) If the car has been subject to theft,
attempted theft, vandalism, or flooding,
have the airbag system inspected at an Alfa
Romeo Dealership.
98) Malfunction of the airbag failure
warning light is indicated by the activation
of an airbag failure icon and a dedicated
message on the instrument panel display.
The pyrotechnic charges are not disabled.
Before continuing, contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership immediately to have the system
checked.
108
99) The airbag deployment threshold is
higher than that of the pretensioners. For
collisions in the range between the two
thresholds, it is normal for only the
pretensioners to be activated.
100) The airbag does not replace seat belts
but increases their efficiency. Because front
airbags are not deployed for low-speed
crashes, side collisions, rear-end shunts or
rollovers, occupants are protected, in
addition to any side bags, only by their seat
belts, which must therefore always be
fastened.
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING THE ENGINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARKING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"ALFA DNA™" SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
START & STOP EVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPEED LIMITER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRUISE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACTIVE CRUISE CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARK SENSORS SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM . . . .
REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC GRIDLINES .
REFUELLING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AdBlue® (UREA) ADDITIVE FOR DIESEL EMISSIONS
SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOWING TRAILERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Let’s get to the core of the vehicle: seeing how you can exploit all
of its potential to the full. We’ll look at how to drive it safely in any
situation, so that it can be a welcome companion, with our comfort
and our wallets in mind.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.110
.111
.114
.116
.117
.118
.119
.120
.127
.129
.130
.131
.136
.136
.137
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING THE ENGINE
PROCEDURE FOR DIESEL VERSIONS
32)
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting the engine, adjust the
seat, the interior rear view mirrors, the
door mirrors and fasten the seat belt
correctly.
Never press the accelerator pedal for
starting the engine.
If necessary, messages indicating the
starting procedure can be shown on the
display.
Proceed as follows:
engage the parking brake and set the
gear lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral);
fully depress the brake pedal without
touching the accelerator;
briefly press the ignition button;
if the engine doesn't start within a few
seconds, you need to repeat the
procedure.
If the problem persists, contact an Alfa
Romeo Dealership.
101) 102) 103)
ENGINE STARTING FAILURE
30) 31) 33)
Starting the engine with electronic key
battery (Keyless Start) run down or flat
If the ignition device does not respond
when the relevant button is pressed the
electronic key battery might be run down
or flat. Therefore, the system does not
detect the presence of the electronic key
on board the car and displays a dedicated
message.
In this case, follow the instructions in
paragraph "Starting with flat key battery"
in the "Knowing your car" chapter and
start the engine normally.
Proceed as follows:
engage the electric parking brake and
set the gear lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral),
fully depress the brake pedal without
touching the accelerator;
briefly press the ignition button;
if the engine doesn't start within a few
seconds, you need to repeat the
procedure.
if the problem persists, contact an Alfa
Romeo Dealership.
110
STOPPING THE ENGINE
33)
To stop the engine, proceed as follows:
park the car in a position that is not
dangerous for oncoming traffic;
engage P (Park) mode;
with engine idling, press the start
button.
Cars with electronic key (Keyless Start)
If the car speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h),
it is still possible to stop the engine if a
gear operating mode other than P (Park)
is selected. To switch off the engine in
this situation, hold down the ignition
device button for a while or press it
3 times in a row within a few seconds.
WARNING
101) It is dangerous to run the engine in
enclosed areas. The engine takes in oxygen
and releases carbon dioxide, carbon
monoxide and other toxic gases.
102) The electro-hydraulic braking system
is not active until the engine starts running.
So, the brake pedal travel will be longer than
normal. This does not indicate a fault.
103) Do not start the engine by pushing,
towing or driving downhill. These
manoeuvres may damage the catalytic
converter.
PARKING THE VEHICLE
IMPORTANT
30) We recommend that during the initial
period, or during the first 1600 km
(1000 miles), you do not drive to full car
performance (e.g. excessive acceleration,
long journeys at top speed, sharp braking,
etc.).
31) When the engine stopped never leave
the ignition device in the ON position to
prevent useless current draw from draining
the battery.
32) Warning light
will flash after starting
or during prolonged cranking to indicate a
fault with the glow plug heating system. If
the engine starts, the vehicle can be regularly
used, but an Alfa Romeo Dealership must be
contacted as soon as possible.
33) A quick burst on the accelerator before
turning off the engine serves absolutely no
practical purpose; it wastes fuel and is
damaging for the engine.
104) 105) 106)
IMPORTANT In addition to parking the
vehicle with the parking brake always
engaged, the wheels turned, chocks or
stones positioned in front of the wheels
(when on a steep slope), you must always:
engage P (Park) mode;
always take the key with you when
leaving the vehicle.
IMPORTANT Always engage the electric
parking brake before leaving the vehicle.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
The car is equipped with electric parking
brake to guarantee better use and
optimal performance compared to a
manually operated parking brake.
The electric parking brake features a
switch, located on the central tunnel
fig. 96, a motor with caliper for each rear
wheel and an electronic control module.
96
07046V0001EM
The electric parking brake can be
engaged in two ways:
manually, by pulling the switch on the
central tunnel;
automatically in "Safe Hold" or "Auto
Park Brake" conditions.
IMPORTANT Normally, the electric
parking brake is engaged automatically
when the engine is stopped. This function
can be deactivated/activated on the
Connect system by selecting the
following items in sequence on the main
menu: "Settings", "Driver assistance" and
"Automatic parking brake".
IMPORTANT Should the vehicle battery
be faulty, to unlock the electric parking
brake the battery must be replaced.
111
STARTING AND DRIVING
Engaging the parking brake manually
Briefly pull the switch located on the
central tunnel to manually engage the
electric parking brake when the car is
stationary.
Noise may be heard from the rear part of
the car when engaging the electric
parking brake.
A slight movement of the brake pedal
may be detected when engaging the
electric parking brake with the brake
pedal pressed.
With the electric parking brake engaged,
on the instrument
the warning light
panel and the LED on the switch
fig. 96 turn on.
IMPORTANT With the Electronic Parking
Brake failure warning light on, some
functions of the electric parking brake
are deactivated. In this case the driver is
responsible for brake activation and
vehicle parking in complete safety
conditions.
If, under exceptional circumstances, the
use of the brake is required with the
vehicle in motion, keep the switch on the
central tunnel pulled as long as the brake
action is necessary.
warning light may switch on with
The
the hydraulic system temporarily
unavailable; in this case braking is
controlled by the motors.
112
The brake lights (stop) will also
automatically switch on in the same way
as for normal braking with the use of the
brake pedal.
Release the switch on the central tunnel
to stop the braking action with the car in
motion.
If, through this procedure, the vehicle is
braked until a speed below 2 mph
(3 km/h) is reached and the switch is kept
pulled, the parking brake will definitively
engage.
IMPORTANT Driving the vehicle with the
electric parking brake engaged, or using
it several times to slow down the vehicle,
may cause severe damage to the braking
system.
Releasing the electric parking brake
manually
In order to manually release the parking
brake, the ignition device should be at ON
position. Moreover, you need to press the
brake pedal, then press the switch on the
central tunnel briefly.
Noise may be heard from the rear of the
vehicle and a slight movement of the
brake pedal may be detected during
disengagement.
After disengaging the electric parking
warning light on the
brake, the
instrument panel and the LED on the
fig. 96 switch turn off.
warning light on the instrument
If the
panel remains on with the electric parking
brake disengaged, this indicates a fault:
in this case contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
IMPORTANT Never use gear position P
(Park) instead of the electric parking
brake. Always engage the electric
parking brake when parking the vehicle to
prevent injury or damage caused by the
unexpected movement of the vehicle.
OPERATING THE ELECTRIC PARKING
BRAKE
The electric parking brake can operate in
the following ways:
"Dynamic driving way": this way is
activated by pulling the switch
continuously while driving;
"Static engagement and release
mode": with the car stationary, the
electric parking brake can be activated
by pulling the switch on the central tunnel
once. On the other hand, press the switch
and the brake pedal at the same time to
disengage the brake;
"Drive Away Release": (where
provided) the electric parking brake will
automatically disengage with the driver
side seat belt fastened and the detection
of an action performed by the driver to
move the car (forward gear or reverse
gear);
NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with
carbon-ceramic discs, before using “Drive
Away Release” mode and moving the
vehicle, it is necessary to buckle the seat
belts or manually release the electric
handbrake to prevent damage to the
carbon-ceramic discs themselves.
"Safe Hold": if the vehicle speed is
lower than 2 mph (3 km/h), the gear lever
is not in P (Park) position and the driver's
intention of leaving the vehicle is
detected, the electric parking brake will
automatically engage to hold the vehicle
in safety conditions;
"Auto Park Brake": if the vehicle speed
is below 2 mph (3 km/h), the electric
parking break will automatically engage
when the gear lever is in P (Park) position.
When the parking brake is engaged and
applied to the wheels, the LED on the
switch located on the central tunnel
fig. 96 switches on together with the
on the instrument
warning light
panel. Each automatic parking brake
engagement can be cancelled by pressing
the switch on the central tunnel and at
the same time moving the gear lever for
the transmission to position P (Park).
SAFE HOLD
It is a safety function that automatically
engages the electric parking brake in the
event of a dangerous condition for the
car.
If:
the car speed is below 2 mph (3 km/h);
a transmission mode other than P
(Park) is activated;
the driver's seat belt is not fastened;
the driver side door is open;
no attempts to apply pressure on the
brake pedal have been detected;
the car is parked on roads which
gradient higher than 4%;
the electric parking brake engages
automatically to prevent car movement.
The Safe Hold function can be
temporarily disabled by pressing the
switch located on the central tunnel and
the brake pedal at the same time, with
the vehicle stationary and the driver side
door open.
Once disabled, the function will activate
again when the vehicle speed reaches
18 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition device is
moved to STOP and then to ON.
WARNING
104) In the case of parking manoeuvres on
roads on a gradient, the front wheels must
be steered towards the pavement (when
parking downhill), or in the opposite
direction if the vehicle is parked uphill. Block
the wheels with a wedge or a stone if the car
is parked on a steep slope.
105) Never leave children alone in an
unattended vehicle; make sure that when
you move away from the vehicle, you have
the key with you.
106) The electric parking brake must
always be engaged when leaving the vehicle.
113
STARTING AND DRIVING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed
automatic transmission.
The transmission can operate in two
different modes: “Automatic” or
“Sequential”.
GEAR LEVER
107) 108) 109)
34) 35)
Gearbox operation is controlled by the
shift lever 1 fig. 97, which can have the
following operating positions:
P = Park
R = Reverse
N = Neutral
D = Drive, (automatic forward speed)
AutoStick: + shifting to higher gear in
sequential driving mode; – shifting to
lower gear in sequential driving mode.
97
114
07076V0002EM
The positions diagram is illustrated on
the top of the lever.
The letter corresponding to the selected
mode lights up and can be seen on the
instrument panel display.
To select one of the operating modes,
move the lever forwards or backwards
and press the brake pedal at the same
time.
To engage R (Reverse) mode, press the
brake pedal and the button 3
fig. 98 together.
To pass from P (Park) mode directly to D
(Drive) mode, in addition to pressing the
brake pedal, it is also necessary to press
button 3.
To pass from R (Reverse) mode directly
to D (Drive) mode and vice versa, in
addition to pressing the brake pedal, it is
necessary to press button 3.
The P (Parking) mode can be enabled
pressing the P (Parking) 2 button fig. 97.
98
07076V0005EM
It is not possible to select N (Neutral)
mode from P (Park) mode.
P (Park) mode is automatically activated
if the following conditions are met
simultaneously:
D (Drive) or R (Reverse) mode is active;
the car’s speed is close to 0;
the brake pedal is released;
the driver’s seat belt is not fastened;
the driver’s door is open.
If using the gear shift in "sequential"
mode. you can activate it by moving the
lever from D (Drive) to the left and then
forward towards the - symbol or back
towards the + symbol and the gear is
shifted.
To exit position P (Park), or to pass from
position N (Neutral) to position D (Drive)
or R (Reverse) when the vehicle is
stopped or is moving at a low speed, the
brake pedal must also be pressed.
IMPORTANT DO NOT accelerate while
shifting from position P (or N) to another
position.
IMPORTANT After selecting a gear, wait
a few seconds before accelerating. This
precaution is particularly important with
a cold engine.
AutoStick - Manual (sequential)
shifting mode
In the case of frequent gearshifting (e.g.
for sport driving, when the vehicle is
driven with a heavy load, on slopes, with
strong headwind or when towing heavy
trailers), it is recommended to use the
Autostick (sequential shifting) mode to
select and keep a lower fixed ratio.
In these conditions, the use of a lower
gear improves vehicle performance,
preventing overheating.
It is possible to shift from D mode (Drive)
to sequential mode regardless of vehicle
speed.
Activation
Starting from D (Drive) mode, to activate
the sequential drive mode, move the
lever to the left (– and + indication of the
trim). The gear engaged will be shown on
the display.
Gearshifting is made by moving the gear
lever forwards, towards symbol – or
backwards, towards symbol +.
Steering wheel stalks
(where provided)
The gear can also be manually shifted by
using the levers behind the steering
wheel. Pull the right shift lever (+)
towards the steering wheel and release it
to engage a higher gear; perform the
same operation with the left lever (-) to
engage a lower gear fig. 99.
To engage N (Neutral): pull
simultaneously both levers.
To activate D (Drive) mode, from N
(Neutral), P (Parking) and R (Reverse):
push the brake pedal and the right lever
(+).
99
07076V0006EM
IMPORTANT If only one manual shift is
necessary, the letter D will remain on the
display with the engaged gear next to it.
Deactivation
To deactivate the sequential driving
mode, bring the gear lever back in
position D (Drive) ("automatic" driving
mode).
TRANSMISSION EMERGENCY
FUNCTION
(where provided)
Transmission operation is constantly
monitored to detect any fault. If a
condition that might damage the
transmission is detected, the
"transmission emergency" function is
activated.
In this condition, the transmission stays
in 4 th gear, regardless of the selected
gear. The P (Parking), R (Reverse) and N
(Neutral) modes continue to work.
symbol might light up in the
The
display.
In the event of a "transmission
emergency" immediately contact the
nearest Alfa Romeo Dealership.
Temporary failure
If the warning light turns on, the failure
may be temporary, in which case, proceed
as follows to restore correct
transmission operation:
stop the vehicle;
engage P (Park) mode;
bring the ignition device to STOP;
wait for about 10 seconds, then
restart the engine;
115
STARTING AND DRIVING
select the desired gear: if the problem
is not detected anymore the
transmission correct operation is
restored.
IMPORTANT In the event of a temporary
failure it is in any case recommended to
contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as
soon as possible.
GEAR ENGAGEMENT DISABLING
SYSTEM WITHOUT BRAKE PEDAL
PRESSED
This system prevents you from moving
the gear lever from position P (Park) if
the brake pedal has not been previously
depressed.
To bring the gear lever to a position other
than P (Park), the ignition device must be
in position AVV (engine on or off) and the
brake pedal must be pressed.
109) Do not shift the gear lever to N
(Neutral) and do not stop the engine when
driving on a downhill road. This type of
driving is dangerous and reduces the
possibility of intervening in the case of
variation of the road traffic or surface. You
risk losing control of your vehicle and
causing accidents.
IMPORTANT
34) Before selecting P (Park) mode, bring the
ignition device to position ON and press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, the gear lever may
get damaged.
35) Engage reverse only with the car
stationary, engine at idling speed and
accelerator fully released.
"ALFA DNA™" SYSTEM
“Alfa DNA™” SYSTEM (car dynamic
control system)
This device allows, using the selector
fig. 100 (on the central tunnel), different
car response modes to be selected
according to driving style and road
conditions:
d = Dynamic (sports driving mode)
n = Normal (mode for driving in normal
conditions)
a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving
mode for maximum fuel savings)
RACE = track race driving mode (where
provided)
= adjusts the calibration of the
suspensions (where provided)
When the engine is stopped, the selector
always returns to “ n” (Normal) mode.
WARNING
107) Never use position P (Park) instead of
the electric parking brake. Always engage
the electric parking brake when parking the
vehicle to avoid the accidental movement of
the vehicle.
108) If the P (Park) position is not engaged,
the vehicle could move and injure people.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that
the gear lever is in position P and that the
electric parking brake is engaged.
116
100
07076V0004EM
DRIVING MODES
START & STOP EVO
"Normal" Mode
On/off
It is activated by rotating the selector to
the letter "n", the displays light up in blue.
To deactivate the Normal mode, move
the selector to another mode ("d" or "a").
"Dynamic" Mode
On/off
It is activated by rotating the selector to
the letter "d", the displays light up in red.
To deactivate the Dynamic mode, move
the selector to "n", Normal mode.
"Advanced Efficiency" Mode
On/off
It is activated by rotating the selector to
the letter "a", the displays light up in
green.
To deactivate the Advanced Efficiency
mode, move the selector to "n", Normal
mode.
IMPORTANT NOTE
The selector will always be positioned
in Normal “n” mode when the engine is
started.
The Stop/Start Evo automatically stops
the engine each time the vehicle is
stationary and starts it again when the
driver wants to move off.
In this way, the vehicle efficiency is
increased, by reducing consumption,
dangerous gas emissions and sound
pollution.
OPERATING MODE
Stopping the engine
With car at a standstill and brake pedal
pressed, the engine switches off if the
gear lever is in a position other than R.
The system does not operate when the
gear lever is in R, for making parking
manoeuvres easier.
In the event of stops uphill, engine
switching off is disabled to make the "Hill
Start Assist" function available (works
only with running engine).
NOTE The engine can only be
automatically stopped after having run at
about 6.2 mph (10 km/h). After an
automatic restart, to stop the engine you
only need to move the car (exceed a
speed of 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h).
Engine stopping is signalled by the
symbol lighting up on the instrument
panel display.
Restarting the engine
To restart the engine, release the brake
pedal.
With the brake pressed and the
transmission in automatic mode D
(Drive), the engine will restart by shifting
to R (Reverse), for petrol engine versions
only, to "AutoStick".
With brake pressed, also for versions
with petrol engines, if the gear lever is in
"AutoStick" mode, the engine can be
restarted by moving the lever to + or -.
SYSTEM MANUAL ACTIVATION/
DEACTIVATION
110)
36)
To manually activate/deactivate the
system, press the button inserted in the
control panel on the left of the steering
wheel, fig. 101
101
07126V0001EM
LED off: system activated;
LED on: system deactivated.
117
STARTING AND DRIVING
SAFETY FUNCTIONS
When the engine is stopped through the
Start & Stop Evo system, if the driver
releases their seat belt, opens the
driver's or passenger's door or releases
the engine bonnet from inside the vehicle,
the engine can be restarted only by using
the ignition device.
This condition is indicated to the driver
both through a buzzer and a message on
the display.
WARNING
110) When replacing the battery, always
contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership. Replace
the battery with one of the same type
(HEAVY DUTY) and with the same
specifications.
IMPORTANT
36) If the climate comfort is to be favoured,
the Start&Stop system can be deactivated,
for a continuous operation of the climate
control system.
118
SPEED LIMITER
DESCRIPTION
This device allows the speed of the car to
be limited to values which can be set by
the driver.
The maximum speed can be set both with
vehicle stationary and in motion. The
minimum speed that can be set is 20 mph
(30 km/h).
When the device is active, the vehicle
speed depends on the pressure at the
accelerator pedal, until the set speed
limit is reached.
ACTIVATING THE DEVICE
The function can be activated/
deactivated on the Connect system.
Activating the device
To access the function, on the main menu
select the following items in sequence:
"Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and
“on”.
The activation of the device is signalled
by the displaying of the green symbol
along with the last speed set.
SPEED LIMIT PROGRAMMING
To access the function, on the main menu
select the following items in sequence:
"Settings", "Safety" and "Speed Limiter
Set Speed".
By turning the Rotary Pad, the speed
increases by 5 mph (5 km/h), on rotation,
from a minimum of 20 mph (30 km/h) to a
maximum of 110 mph (180 km/h).
DEACTIVATING THE DEVICE
Deactivating the device
To access the function, on the main menu
select the following items in sequence:
"Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and
“off”.
Automatic deactivation of the device
The device deactivates automatically in
the event of fault in the system. In this
case, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
CRUISE CONTROL
This is an electronically controlled driving
assistance device that allows the desired
car speed to be maintained, without
having to press the accelerator pedal.
This device can be used at a speed above
25 mph (40 km/h) on long stretches of
dry, straight roads with few variations
(e.g. motorways).
It is therefore not recommended to use
this device on extra-urban roads with
traffic. Do not use the device in town.
Travelling downhill, the system could
brake the car to keep the set speed
unvaried.
ACTIVATING THE DEVICE
111) 112) 113)
To activate the device press button
fig. 102.
The activation of the device is signalled
by the switching on of the white warning
on the display.
light
The Cruise Control function can remain
active concurrently with the Speed
Limiter system. If a speed limit below the
one indicated in the Cruise Control is
selected, the Cruise Control speed will be
lowered to that of the Speed Limiter.
accelerator; when you release the pedal,
the vehicle goes back to the speed stored
previously.
When travelling downhills with the device
active, the vehicle speed may slightly
exceed the stored one.
IMPORTANT Before raising/lowering the
SET switch the vehicle must be travelling
at a constant speed on a flat surface.
102
07146V0001EM
The device cannot be engaged in 1 st or
reverse gear: it is advisable to engage it
in 3 rd gear or higher.
IMPORTANT It is dangerous to leave the
device on when it is not used. There is a
risk of inadvertently activating it and
losing control of the vehicle due to
unexpected excessive speed.
SETTING THE DESIRED SPEED
Proceed as follows:
activate the device;
when the vehicle has reached the
desired speed, raise/lower the SET
switch and release fig. 102 to activate
the device. When the accelerator is
released, the vehicle will keep the
selected speed automatically.
If needed (when overtaking for instance),
you can accelerate simply by pressing the
INCREASING/DECREASING SPEED
Once the Cruise Control has been
activated, the speed can be
increased/decreased by lifting the SET
switch fig. 102.
Keeping the button pressed, the set
speed will increase until the button is
released, then the new speed will be
stored.
Accelerating when overtaking
Depress the accelerator pedal: when this
is released the vehicle will gradually go
back to the stored speed.
IMPORTANT The device keeps the speed
stored even uphill and downhill. A slight
variation in the speed on slight rises is
completely normal.
119
STARTING AND DRIVING
ACTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
SPEED RETURN
For versions with automatic transmission
operating in D mode (Drive - automatic),
press and release the RES
fig. 102 button to recall the previously
set speed.
For versions with manual gearbox or
automatic transmission in Autostick
(sequential) mode, before recalling the
previously set speed you should
accelerate until getting close to it, then
press and release the RES button.
DEACTIVATING THE DEVICE
Lightly pressing the brake pedal
deactivates the Cruise Control without
deleting the stored speed.
The Cruise Control may be deactivated
also by applying the electric parking
brake or when the braking system is
operated (e.g. operation of the ESC
system).
The stored speed is deleted in the
following cases:
pressing the on/off button or
switching off the engine;
if there is a malfunction in the Cruise
Control.
DEACTIVATING THE DEVICE
The Cruise Control is deactivated by
pressing the system on/off button or by
putting the starter switch in the STOP
position.
120
WARNING
111) When travelling with the device active,
never move the gear lever to neutral.
112) In case of a malfunction or failure of
the device, contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
113) The Cruise Control can be dangerous if
the system cannot keep a constant speed. In
specific conditions speed may be excessive,
resulting in the risk of losing control of the
vehicle and causing accidents. Do not use the
device in heavy traffic or on winding, icy,
snowy or slippery roads.
(where provided)
114) 115) 116) 117) 118) 119)
37) 38) 39) 40) 41) 42) 43)
The Active Cruise Control (ACC) is a
driver assist device which combines the
Cruise Control functions with one for
controlling the distance from the vehicle
ahead.
The device allows to hold the vehicle at
the desired speed without needing to
press the accelerator. It also allows to
hold a given distance from the vehicle
ahead (the distance can be set by the
driver).
The Active Cruise Control (ACC) uses a
radar sensor, located behind the front
bumper fig. 103 and a camera, located in
the middle area of the windscreen
fig. 104, to detect the presence of a
vehicle close ahead.
103
104
06016V0003EM
06016V0004EM
The device further enhances driving
comfort provided by the electronic
Cruise Control when on the motorway or
out of town with light traffic.
Important notes
If the sensor does not detect any vehicle
ahead, the device will maintain a fixed set
speed.
If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead, the
device automatically intervenes by
braking (or accelerating) slightly in order
not to exceed the original set speed, so
that the vehicle keeps the preset
distance, seeking to adapt to the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
In the cases described below, the system
performance is not guaranteed, it is
therefore advisable to turn the device on
fig. 105 button:
by pressing the
driving in fog, heavy rain, snow, heavy
traffic and in complex driving situations
(e.g. on motorways with roadworks in
progress);
driving near a bend (winding roads), icy,
snowy, slippery roads or with steep
climbs and descents;
entering a turn lane or on a slip road;
towing a trailer;
when circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
105
07146V0010EM
With the device enabled and ready for
operation, the display shows the white
icon with dashes fig. 106 in place of the
speed.
ACTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION
The device may have four operating
states:
Enabled (speed not programmed);
Activated (speed programmed);
Paused;
Deactivated.
Enabling / Activation
To enable the device, press and release
fig. 105 button.
the
106
07146S0016EM
Setting a speed activates the system.
The displays shows the green icon with
the set speed.
IMPORTANT It is dangerous to leave the
device activated when it is not used.
121
STARTING AND DRIVING
There is a risk of inadvertently activating
it and losing control of the vehicle due to
unexpected excessive speed.
Pausing / Deactivating
With the device enabled (speed not set),
button.
press the
With the device activated (speed set),
press the
button to enter the Paused
state. The display shows the white icon
with the speed in brackets. Press the
button again to deactivate the device
completely.
SETTING THE DESIRED SPEED
Speeds from 30 km/h (or 20 mph for
markets with instrument panels set
to mph) to 160 km/h (or 100 mph for
markets with instrument panels set
to mph) can be set.
When the vehicle reaches the desired
speed, raise/lower the SET switch
fig. 107 and release it to activate the
device. When the accelerator is released,
the vehicle will keep the selected speed
automatically
122
107
07146V0017EM
Holding the accelerator pressed the
device will not be able to control the
distance between the vehicle and the one
ahead. In this case the speed will be
determined only by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
The device will return to normal
operation as soon as the accelerator
pedal is released.
The system cannot be set:
when pressing the brake pedal;
when the brakes are overheated;
when the electric parking brake is
engaged;
when it is in P (park), R (reverse) or N
(neutral) mode;
when the engine speed is above a
maximum threshold;
when the car speed is not within the
settable speed range;
when the ESC (or ABS or other
stability control systems) are operating
or have just operated;
when the ESC system is off;
during automatic braking by the
Forward Collision Warning Plus system
(where provided);
in the event of device failure;
when the engine is off;
in case of obstruction of the radar
sensor (in this case the bumper area
where it is located must be cleaned).
In case of system set, the conditions
described above also cause a
cancellation or deactivation of the
system with times that may vary
according to the conditions.
IMPORTANT The device is not
deactivated on reaching speeds higher
than those that can be set (160 km/h or
100 mph for instrument panel set
to mph) with the accelerator pedal
pressed. In these conditions, the device
may not work correctly and it is advisable
to deactivate it.
CHANGING SPEED
Speed increase
Once the device has been activated, you
can increase the speed by lifting the SET
switch. Each time it is operated, the
speed increases by 1 mph (1 km/h).
By holding the button up, the set speed
will increase in steps of 6 mph (10 km/h)
until the button is released, then the new
speed will be stored.
Decreasing speed
Once the device has been activated, you
can decrease the speed by lowering the
SET switch. Each time it is operated, the
speed decreases by 1 mph (1 km/h).
By holding the button down, the set
speed will decrease in steps of 6 mph
(10 km/h) until the button is released,
then the new speed will be stored.
IMPORTANT Moving the SET switch
allows you to adjust the speed according
to the selected unit of measurement
("metric" or "imperial") set on the
Connect system (see dedicated
supplement).
Important notes
By keeping the accelerator pedal
depressed, the car can continue to
accelerate beyond the set speed. In this
case, use the SET switch to set the speed
to the vehicle’s current speed.
When the SET button is pressed to
reduce the speed, the braking system
intervenes automatically if the engine
brake does not slow the car down
sufficiently to reach the set speed. The
device holds the set speed uphill and
downhill; however a slight variation is
entirely normal, particularly on slight
gradients.
The automatic transmission could change
to a lower gears when driving downhill or
when accelerating. This is normal and
necessary to maintain the set speed.
The device is switched off while driving if
the brakes overheat.
ACCELERATING WHEN OVERTAKING
When driving with the device active and
following a vehicle, the device provides
additional acceleration to facilitate
overtaking, when travelling over a given
speed and switches on the left direction
indicator (of the right indicator for
right-hand drive versions).
In left-hand traffic, the overtaking assist
function is only active when the left-hand
lane is used for overtaking the vehicle
ahead (the opposite activation logic is
used in right-hand traffic countries).
The device detects the direction of
traffic automatically when the vehicle
passes from left-hand traffic to
right-hand traffic. In this case, the
overtaking assist function is only active
when the reference vehicle is overtaken
on the right. The additional acceleration
is activated when the driver uses the
right direction indicator.
In this condition, the device no longer
provides the overtaking assist function
on the left-hand side until it determines
that the vehicle has returned to left-hand
traffic conditions.
RECALLING THE SPEED
Once the system has been cancelled but
not deactivated, if a speed was
previously set simply press the RES
button and remove your foot from the
accelerator to recall it.
The system will be set to the last stored
speed.
108
07146V0018EM
Before returning to the previously set
speed, bring the speed close to that
value, then press the RES button and
release it.
IMPORTANT The recall function must
only be used if the road and traffic
conditions so allow. Recalling an
excessively high or low speed for the
current traffic and road conditions could
cause an acceleration or a deceleration
123
STARTING AND DRIVING
of the vehicle. Failure to comply with
these precautions may cause serious
accidents and fatal injuries.
been modified by the driver, the new
distance will be stored also after the
system is deactivated and reactivated.
SETTING THE DISTANCE BETWEEN
VEHICLES
To decrease the distance
Press and release the fig. 110 button to
decrease the distance setting. The
distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter) every time the button is
pressed.
The distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead may be set to 1 bar
(short), 2 bars (medium), 3 bars (long) or
4 bars (maximum) fig. 109.
109
07146S0019EM
The distances from the vehicle ahead are
proportional to speed.
The interval of time with respect to the
vehicle ahead remains constant and
varies from 1 second (for the short
distance 1-bar setting) to 2 seconds (for
the maximum distance 4-bar setting).
The set distance is shown on the display
with a dedicated symbol.
The setting is 4 (maximum) the first time
the device is used. After the distance has
124
110
07146V0015EM
The set speed is held if there are no
vehicles ahead. Once the shortest
distance has been reached, a further
press of the button will set the longest
distance.
If a vehicle is detected in the same lane at
a lower speed, the symbol on the display
turns from grey to white. The device
automatically adjusts the car’s speed to
maintain the set distance, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle holds the set distance until:
the vehicle ahead accelerates to a
speed higher than the set speed;
the vehicle ahead leaves the lane or
the detection field of the Active Cruise
Control sensor;
the distance setting is changed;
Active Cruise Control is
deactivated/paused.
IMPORTANT The maximum breaking
applied by the device is limited. The
driver may apply the brakes in all cases if
needed.
IMPORTANT If the device predicts that
the level of braking is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance, the word
“BRAKE!” or a dedicated message on the
display warns the driver that the vehicle
ahead is too close. An acoustic signal is
also emitted. In this case, it is advisable
to brake immediately as necessary to
hold a safe distance from the vehicle
ahead.
IMPORTANT The driver is responsible for
ensuring that there are no pedestrians,
other vehicles or objectives along the
direction of the vehicle. Failure to comply
with these precautions may cause
serious accidents and injuries.
IMPORTANT The driver is fully
responsible for holding a safe distance
from the vehicle ahead respecting the
highway code in force in the respective
country.
“STOP AND GO” STRATEGY
The “Stop and Go” operating strategy
allows you to maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle ahead until the car has
completely stopped. It will also restart
the car automatically if the vehicle ahead
moves off within two seconds, otherwise
it is necessary to press the accelerator
pedal or the RES button to restart.
DEACTIVATION
The device is deactivated and the set
speed is cancelled if:
the
button on the Active Cruise
Control is pressed (with the device on or
paused);
the starter switch is in the STOP
position;
The device is cancelled (the set speed
and distance are stored):
when the device is paused (see the
“Active Cruise Control Activation /
Deactivation” paragraph);
when the conditions shown in the
“Setting the desired speed” paragraph
occur;
SYSTEM LIMITED OPERATION
WARNING
If the dedicated message is shown on the
display, a condition limiting the system
operation may have occurred.
The possible reasons of this limitation
are something blocking the camera view
or a fault. If an obstruction is signalled,
clean the area of the windscreen
indicated in fig. 104 and check that the
message has disappeared.
When the conditions limiting the system
functions end, this will go back to normal
and complete operation.
Should the fault persist, contact an Alfa
Romeo Dealership.
PRECAUTIONS WHILE DRIVING
The device may not work correctly in
some driving conditions (see below): the
driver must control the car at all times.
Towing a trailer
Use of the device is not recommended
while towing a trailer.
VEHICLE not aligned
The device may not detect a vehicle
travelling on the same lane but which is
not aligned along the same direction of
travel or a vehicle which is cutting in from
a side lane. Sufficient distance from the
vehicles ahead may not be guaranteed in
these cases.
The non-aligned vehicle can weave in and
out of the driving direction causing the
vehicle to brake or accelerate
unexpectedly.
Steering and bends
When cornering with the device set, it
could limit speed and acceleration to
guarantee vehicle stability even if no
vehicles are detected ahead. When
leaving the bend, the device resets the
previously set speed.
IMPORTANT In case of narrow curves,
the performance of the device could be
limited. In this case, it is advisable to
deactivate the device. Moreover,
remember that the device only limits the
speed DURING a bend and not BEFORE
it, so always take great care.
Using the device on gradient
When driving on roads with variable
gradient, the device may not detect the
presence of a vehicle on the lane. Device
performance could be limited according
to speed, load, traffic conditions and
gradient steepness.
Lane change
The device may not detect the presence
of a vehicle until it is fully in your lane.
In this case, sufficient distance from the
vehicle which is changing lane may not be
guaranteed: it is advisable to pay the
125
STARTING AND DRIVING
utmost attention at all times and be
always ready to press the brakes if
needed.
Small cars
Some narrow cars (e.g. bicycles and
motorcycles) travelling near the outer
edges of the lane or which enter the lane
from kerbside are not detected until they
are fully in the lane.
Sufficient distance from the cars ahead
may not be guaranteed in these cases.
Stationary objects and vehicles
The device cannot detect the presence of
stationary vehicles or objects. For
example, the device will not operate if
the vehicle ahead leaves the lane and a
vehicle ahead of that one is standing on
the lane. Pay the utmost attention at all
times and be always ready to press the
brakes if needed.
Objects and cars moving in opposite or
crosswise direction
The device cannot detect the presence of
objects or vehicles travelling in opposite
or at right-angles and consequently will
not be operated.
WARNING
114) Pay the utmost attention while driving
at all times and be always ready to press the
brakes if needed.
126
115) The system is an aid for the driver, who
must always pay full attention while driving.
The responsibility always rests with the
driver, who must take into account the
traffic conditions in order to drive in
complete safety. The driver must always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in
front.
116) The device is not activated in presence
of pedestrians, oncoming vehicles in the
opposite direction of travel or moving in the
crosswise direction and stationary objects
(e.g. a vehicle standing in a queue or a broken
down vehicle).
117) The device cannot take account of
road, traffic and weather conditions, and
conditions of poor visibility (e.g. fog).
118) The device does not always fully
recognise complex driving conditions that
could cause it to determine the safe distance
to be held incorrectly or not at all.
119) The device cannot apply the maximum
braking force: the car will not be stopped
completely.
IMPORTANT
37) The system may have limited or absent
operation due to weather conditions such as:
heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow.
38) The section of the bumper before the
sensor must not be covered with adhesives,
auxiliary headlights or any other object.
39) Operation can be adversely affected by
any structural change made to the vehicle,
such as a modification to the front geometry,
tyre change, or a heavier load than the
standard load of the vehicle.
40) Incorrect repairs made on the front part
of the vehicle (e.g. bumper, chassis) may alter
the position of the radar sensor, and
adversely affect its operation. Go to an Alfa
Romeo Dealership for any operation of this
type.
41) Do not tamper with nor carry out any
intervention on the radar sensor or on the
camera on the windscreen. In the event of a
sensor failure, contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
42) Do not wash with high-pressure jets in
the bumper lower area: in particular do not
operate on the system's electrical connector.
43) Be careful in the case of repairs and new
paintings in the area around the sensor
(panel covering the sensor on the left side of
the bumper). In the event of a frontal impact
the sensor may automatically deactivate
and display a warning to indicate that the
sensor needs to be repaired. Even without a
malfunction warning, deactivate the system
operation if you think that the position of the
radar sensor has changed (e.g. due to
low-speed frontal impact as during parking
manoeuvres). In these cases, go to an Alfa
Romeo Dealership to have the radar sensor
realigned or replaced.
PARK SENSORS SYSTEM
failure, the LED flashes for about
5 seconds, then it stays on constantly.
When the ignition device is set to ON the
Park Sensors system keeps the last state
when the engine was stopped (activated
or deactivated) in its memory.
(where provided)
120)
44) 45) 46)
VERSIONS WITH 4/8 SENSORS
The parking sensors, located in the rear
bumper fig. 111 (4-channel versions) or
front and rear fig. 112 (8-channel
versions), detect the presence of any
obstacles and warn the driver about
them, through an acoustic warning and,
where provided, visual indications on the
instrument panel display.
111
112
07176V0003EM
On/off
To disengage the system, press button
fig. 113.
The LED in the button will light up or not
when the system switches from on to off
(and vice versa).
LED off: system activated;
LED light on steady: system
deactivated;
07176V0001EM
113
07176V0002EM
If the button is pressed with a system
System activation/deactivation
When the reverse gear is engaged, the
system when engaged, activates the
front and rear sensors (where provided).
When the reverse gear is engaged and
the system is on, the front and rear
sensors are activated. If a different gear
is engaged, the rear sensors are
deactivated, while the front sensors
remain active until 9.3 mph (15 km/h) are
exceeded.
Operation with a trailer
The operation of the rear sensors is
automatically deactivated when the
trailer is plugged to the tow hook socket
of the car, while the front sensors (where
provided) stay active and can provide
acoustic and visual warnings.
The sensors are automatically
reactivated when the trailer's cable plug
is removed.
Important notes
Some conditions may influence the
performance of the parking system:
reduced sensor sensitivity and a
reduction in the parking assistance
127
STARTING AND DRIVING
system performance could be due to the
presence of: ice, snow, mud, thick paint,
on the surface of the sensor;
the sensor may detect a non-existent
obstacle ("echo interference") due to
mechanical interference, for example
when washing the vehicle, in rain (strong
wind), hail;
the signals sent by the sensor can also
be altered by the presence of ultrasonic
systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems
of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the
vehicle;
parking assistance system
performance can also be influenced by
the position of the sensors, for example
due to a change in the ride setting
(caused by wear to the shock absorbers,
suspension), or by changing tyres,
overloading the vehicle or carrying out
specific tuning operations that require
the vehicle to be lowered;
the presence of a tow hook without
trailer, which may interfere with the
correct operation of the parking sensors.
Before using the Park Sensors system, it
is recommended to remove the tow hook
ball assembly when the vehicle is not
used for towing. Failure to comply with
this prescription may cause personal
injuries or damage to vehicles or
obstacles since, when the continuous
acoustic warning is emitted, the tow hook
ball is already in a position that is much
128
closer to the obstacle than the rear
bumper. If you wish to leave the tow hook
fitted without towing a trailer, it is
advisable to contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership for the Park Sensors system
update operations because the tow hook
could be detected as an obstacle by the
central sensors.
the presence of adhesives on the
sensors. Therefore, take care not to place
stickers on the sensors.
WARNING
120) Parking and other potentially
dangerous manoeuvres are, however,
always the driver’s responsibility. When
performing these operations, always make
sure that there are no other people
(especially children) or animals on the route
you want to take. The parking sensors are an
aid for the driver, but the driver must never
allow their attention to lapse during
potentially dangerous manoeuvres, even
those executed at low speeds.
IMPORTANT
44) The sensors must be clean of mud, dirt,
snow or ice in order for the system to
operate correctly. Be careful not to scratch
or damage the sensors while cleaning them.
Avoid using dry, rough or hard cloths. The
sensors should be washed using clean water
with the addition of car shampoo if
necessary. When using special washing
equipment such as high pressure jets or
steam cleaning, clean the sensors very
quickly keeping the jet more than 10 cm
away.
45) Have interventions on the bumper in the
area of the sensors carried out only by an
Alfa Romeo Dealership. Interventions on the
bumper that are not carried out properly
may compromise the operation of the
parking sensors.
46) Only have the bumpers repainted or any
retouches to the paintwork in the area of the
sensors carried out by an Alfa Romeo
Dealership. Incorrect paint application could
affect the operation of the parking sensors.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
(LDW) SYSTEM
IMPORTANT
DESCRIPTION
47) 48) 49) 50) 51) 52)
The Lane Departure Warning system
makes use of a camera located on the
windscreen to detect the lane limits and
calculate the position of the vehicle
within such limits, in order to make sure
that it remains inside the lane.
When one or both lane limits are
detected and the vehicle passes over one
without the driver's say-so (direction
indicator not turned on), the system
emits an acoustic signal.
If the vehicle continues to go beyond the
line of the lane without any intervention
from the driver, the surpassed line will
light up on the display (left or right) to
urge the driver to bring the vehicle back
into the limits of the lane.
SYSTEM ON/OFF
The system is activated/deactivated by
pressing the button fig. 114
Each time the engine is started, the
system maintains the operating mode
that was selected when it was previously
switched off.
114
07226S0001EM
Activation conditions
Once switched on, the system becomes
active only if the following conditions are
met:
the car speed is higher than 37 mph
(the system is deactivated at speeds
equal to or higher than 110 mph –
180 km/h);
the lane limit lines are visible at least
on one side;
there are suitable visibility conditions;
the road is straight or with wide radius
bends;
a suitable distance is kept from the
vehicle in front;
the direction indicator (for leaving the
lane) is not active.
47) Projecting loads on the roof of the
vehicle may interfere with the correct
operation of the camera. Before starting
make sure the load is correctly positioned, in
order not to cover the camera operating
range.
48) If the windscreen must be replaced due
to scratches, chipping or breakage, contact
exclusively an Alfa Romeo Dealership. Do not
replace the windscreen on your own, risk of
malfunction! It is advisable to replace the
windscreen if it is damaged in the area of the
camera.
49) Do not tamper with nor operate on the
camera. Do not close the openings in the
aesthetic cover located under the interior
rear view mirror. In the event of a failure of
the camera, contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
50) Do not cover the operating range of the
camera with stickers or other objects. Also
pay attention to other objects on the bonnet
(e.g. a layer of snow) and make sure they do
not interfere with the camera
51) The camera may have limited or absent
operation due to weather conditions such as:
heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow,
formation of ice layers on the windscreen.
129
STARTING AND DRIVING
52) Camera operation may also be
compromised by the presence of dust,
condensation, dirt or ice on the windscreen,
by traffic conditions (e.g. vehicles that are
driving not aligned with yours, vehicle driving
in a transverse or opposite way on the same
lane, bend with a small radius of curvature),
by road surface conditions and by driving
conditions (e.g. off-road driving). Make sure
the windscreen is always clean. Use specific
detergents and clean cloths to avoid
scratching the windscreen. The camera
operation may also be limited or absent in
some driving, traffic and road surface
conditions.
REAR BACK-UP CAMERA /
DYNAMIC GRIDLINES
DESCRIPTION
The Rear Back-up Camera is located on
the tailgate, near the opening button,
fig. 115.
115
Camera activation/deactivation
The function can be activated/
deactivated on the Connect system.
Activating the device
To access the function, on the main menu
select the following items in sequence:
"Settings", "Driver assistance" and "Rear
Back-up Camera". The following
sub-menu appears:
View
Switch-off delay;
Camera Guidelines.
Select "View" to activate the camera
view on the Connect system display.
Every time reverse is engaged, the
display of the Connect system, fig. 116,
shows the area around the vehicle, as
seen by the Rear Back-up Camera.
07186V0001EM
121)
53)
116
130
07186V0002EM
SYMBOLS AND MESSAGES ON THE
DISPLAY
If activated, the grid is positioned on the
image to highlight the width of the
vehicle and the expected reversing path
in accordance with the steering wheel
position.
A superimposed central broken line
indicates the centre of the car to
facilitate parking manoeuvres or tow
hook alignment. The various coloured
areas indicate the distance from the rear
part of the car.
The table below shows the approximate
distances for each area fig. 116:
REFUELLING THE VEHICLE
WARNING
122) 123) 124)
121) Parking and other potentially
dangerous manoeuvres are, however,
always the driver’s responsibility. While
carrying out these manoeuvres, always
make sure that no people (especially
children) or animals are in the area
concerned. The camera is an aid for the
driver, but the driver must never allow
his/her attention to lapse during potentially
dangerous manoeuvres, even those
executed at low speeds. Always keep a slow
speed, so as to promptly brake in the case of
obstacles.
IMPORTANT
Area
Distance from the rear
part of the car
Red
0 - 1 ft (0 – 30 cm)
Yellow
1 - 3.3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green
3.3 ft (1 m) or more
IMPORTANT When parking, take the
utmost care over obstacles that may be
above or under the camera range.
53) It is vital, for correct operation, that the
camera is always kept clean and free from
any mud, dirt, snow or ice. Be careful not to
scratch or damage the camera while cleaning
it. Avoid using dry, rough or hard cloths. The
camera must be washed using clean water,
with the addition of car shampoo if
necessary. In washing stations which use
steam or high-pressure jets, clean the
camera quickly, keeping the nozzle more
than 10 cm away from the sensors. Also, do
not apply stickers to the camera.
Always stop the engine before refuelling.
PETROL ENGINES
Only use unleaded petrol with a number
of octanes (R.O.N.) not lower than 91
(EN228 specification).
DIESEL ENGINES
Only use automotive diesel fuel
(EN590 specification).
REFUELLING PROCEDURE
The fuel flap is unlocked when the central
door locking system is released, while it
is automatically locked when the central
locking system is applied.
Opening the flap
To refuel proceed as follows:
open flap 2 fig. 117, pressing on the
point shown by the arrow fig. 118;
remove the closing cap 2;
put the cap 4 back in position;
introduce the dispenser in the filler
and refuel;
after refuelling, before removing the
dispenser, wait for at least 10 seconds in
order for the fuel to flow inside the tank;
then remove the dispenser from the
filler, close the cap and then close the
flap.
131
STARTING AND DRIVING
The refuelling procedure described
above is illustrated on the label (where
provided) located inside the fuel flap.
TOPPING UP AdBlue® DIESEL
EMISSIONS ADDITIVE
(2.2 JTD versions only)
125)
117
118
132
07226V0042EM
07206V0001EM
Preliminary conditions
AdBlue® freezes at temperatures lower
than 12.2 °F (–11°C). If the car stands for
a long time at this temperature refilling
could be difficult. For this reason, it is
advised to park the car in a garage and/or
heated environment and wait for the
AdBlue® to return to liquid state before
topping up.
Proceed as follows:
park the car on level ground;
switch off the engine by turning the
ignition device to STOP;
open the fuel flap 1 fig. 117, then undo
and remove the cap 3 (blue) from the
AdBlue® filler and place it in the specific
housing 4.
Refilling with nozzles
You can fill up at any AdBlue® distributor.
Proceed as follows:
insert the AdBlue® nozzle in the filler,
start refilling and stop refilling at the first
shut-off (the shut-off indicates that the
AdBlue® tank is full). Do not proceed with
the refilling, to prevent spillage of
AdBlue®;
extract the nozzle.
Refilling with containers
Proceed as follows:
Operations after refilling
Proceed as follows:
fit the cap 3 fig. 117 back on the
AdBlue® filler by turning it clockwise and
screwing it completely;
set the ignition device to ON (it is not
necessary to start the engine);
wait for the indication on the
instrument panel to switch off before
moving the car. The indication may stay
on for a few seconds to approximately
half a minute. If the engine is started and
the car is moved, the indication will
remain on for longer. This will not
compromise engine operation;
if the AdBlue® was topped up when the
tank was empty, see the “Refuelling ”
paragraph in the “Technical
Specifications” chapter and wait for
2 minutes before starting the engine.
IMPORTANT If AdBlue® is spilled out of
the filler neck, clean up well the area and
proceed to filling up again. If the liquid
crystallises, eliminate it with a sponge
and warm water.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT EXCEED THE MAXIMUM
LEVEL: this could cause damage to the
tank. AdBlue® freezes under 12.2°F
(–11°C). Although the system is
designed to operate below the freezing
point of AdBlue®, it is advisable not to
fill the tank beyond the maximum level
because if the AdBlue® freezes the
system can be damaged. Follow the
instructions in the “Topping up AdBlue®
diesel emissions additive” paragraph in
this chapter.
If AdBlue® is spilled on painted
surfaces or aluminium, immediately
clean the area with water and use
absorbent material to collect the fluid
that has been spilled on the ground.
Do not try to start the engine if
AdBlue® was accidentally added to the
Diesel fuel tank, this can result in
serious engine damage, contact an Alfa
Romeo Dealership.
Do not add additives or other fluids
to AdBlue®, doing so could damage the
system.
The use of non-conforming or
degraded AdBlue® may lead to
indications appearing on the
instrument panel display (see “Warning
lights and messages" paragraph in the
“Knowing the instrument panel”
chapter).
Never pour AdBlue® into another
container: it could be contaminated.
In case of damage to the sewage
system of exhaust gas resulting from
the use of additives / tap water, the
introduction of diesel fuel, or at least
by not fulfilling the requirements, the
warranty expires.
If the AdBlue® runs out, see “Warning
lights and messages" paragraph in the
“Knowing the instrument panel”
chapter to continue using the car
normally.
The AdBlue® level is not updated if
the car is parked on a sloping road.
Fuels - identification of vehicle
compatibility. Graphic symbol for
consumer information in accordance
with EN16942
The symbols, shown below, make it easier
to recognise the correct fuel type to use
with your car.
Before refuelling, check the symbols
(where provided) inside the fuel filler flap
and compare them with the symbols
shown on the fuel pump (where provided).
PETROL ENGINES
Inside the flap there is also the fuel type
(UNLEADED FUEL = petrol) and the
symbol (where provided) that certifies
compliance with the EN228 (petrol)
standard fig. 119.
119
07206V0002EM
Symbols for petrol powered cars
E5: unleaded petrol containing up to
2.7% (m/m) oxygen and with maximum
5.0% (V/V) ethanol compliant with the
EN228 specification.
E10: unleaded petrol containing up to
3.7% (m/m) oxygen and with maximum
10.0% (V/V) ethanol compliant with the
EN228 specification.
133
STARTING AND DRIVING
DIESEL ENGINES
The fuel cap shows the type of fuel
(DIESEL - diesel fuel) fig. 120, while
inside the fuel flap there is the symbol
(where provided) that certifies
compliance with the EN590 and
EN16734 (diesel) standards.
120
Emergency diesel version refuelling
Proceed as follows:
open the luggage compartment and
take out the dedicated adapter, located
under the load platform fig. 121;
open flap fig. 118 pressing on the
point shown by the arrow;
remove the closing cap;
put the cap back in position;
insert the adapter into the filler;
when you have finished refuelling,
remove the adapter, close the cap and
then close the flap;
finally put the adaptor back in the
luggage compartment.
Versions with Cargo Box
Proceed as follows:
open the tailgate and then lift up the
load bed fig. 122;
lift the cover 1 fig. 123 upwards so as
to reach the emergency opening wire 2
fig. 124 loaded by the side of the filler;
pull the cable in the direction indicated
by the arrow to release the fuel flap lock;
open the fuel flap by pressing it.
07206V0004EM
Symbols for diesel powered cars
B7: diesel containing up to 7% (V/V) of
FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Esters)
compliant with the EN590 specification.
B10: diesel containing up to 10% (V/V)
of FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Esters)
compliant with the
EN16734 specification.
134
121
122
04206V0004EM
123
07226V0041EM
07206V0005EM
Emergency fuel flap opening
In the event of an emergency the fuel flap
can be opened by operating from inside
the luggage compartment.
WARNING
124
125
08066V0010EM
126
07226V0044EM
07226V0043EM
Versions with Cargo Box and
space-saver spare wheel
(where provided)
Proceed as follows:
open the tailgate and then lift up the
load bed fig. 122;
undo the locking device 1 fig. 125 and
extract the space-saver spare wheel to
reach the emergency opening cable 1
fig. 126 positioned on the side of the
filler;
pull the cord to unlock the fuel flap;
open the fuel flap by pressing it.
122) Do not apply any object/plug to the
end of the filler which is not provided for the
car. The use of non-compliant objects/plugs
could cause a pressure increase inside the
tank, resulting in dangerous situations.
123) Do not bring naked flames or lit
cigarettes near to the fuel filler: fire risk.
Keep your face away from the fuel filler to
prevent breathing in harmful vapours.
124) Do not use a mobile phone near the
refuelling pump: risk of fire.
125) If the AdBlue overheats for a
prolonged period inside the tank to over 50
°C (for example, due to direct solar
irradiation), the AdBlue may decompose and
produce ammonia vapours. Ammonia
vapours have a pungent odour when the cap
of the AdBlue tank is unscrewed, therefore
be careful not to inhale any ammonia
vapours in the tank outlet. In this
concentration, however, the ammonia
vapors are not harmful or dangerous to
health.
IMPORTANT If the filler compartment is
washed with a high-pressure jet, keep it
at a distance of at least 8 in (20 cm).
135
STARTING AND DRIVING
AdBlue® (UREA) ADDITIVE FOR
DIESEL EMISSIONS
(2.2 JTD versions only)
The car is equipped with an UREA
injection system and Selective Catalytic
Reduction to meet emission standards.
These two systems ensure compliance
with the diesel emissions requirements;
at the same time, they ensure
fuel-efficiency, handling, torque and
power. For messages and system
warnings, refer to the "Warning lights and
messages" paragraph in the "Knowing the
instrument panel" chapter.
AdBlue® (UREA) is considered a very
stable product with a long shelf life.
Stored at temperatures LOWER than
89.6° F (32 °C), it has a shelf life of at
least one year.
For more information on the AdBlue®
liquid type, see the “Fluids and lubricants”
paragraph in the “Technical
specifications” chapter.
The car is provided with an automatic
AdBlue® heating system when the engine
starts allowing the system to work
correctly at temperatures lower
than -11 °C.
IMPORTANT AdBlue® freezes at
temperatures lower than 12.2 °F (-11 °C).
136
SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING
SAVING FUEL
Below are some suggestions which may
help you save fuel and thus lower the
amount of harmful emissions released
into the atmosphere.
Vehicle maintenance
Checks and operations should be carried
out in accordance with the "Scheduled
Servicing Plan" (see chapter
"Maintenance and care").
Tyres
Check the tyre pressures at least once
every four weeks: if the pressure is too
low, consumption levels increase as
resistance to rolling is higher.
Unnecessary loads
Do not travel with an overloaded boot.
The weight of the vehicle and its
arrangement greatly affect fuel
consumption and stability.
Electric devices
Use electrical devices only for the
amount of time needed. The heated rear
window, additional headlights, screen
wipers and heater fan require a
considerable amount of energy;
increasing the current uptake increases
fuel consumption (by up to +25% in an
urban cycle).
Climate control system
Using the climate control system will
increase consumption: use standard
ventilation when the temperature
outside permits.
Devices for aerodynamic control
The use of non-certified devices for
aerodynamic control may adversely
affect air drag and consumption levels.
DRIVING STYLE
Starting
Do not warm up the engine at low or high
revs when the vehicle is stationary; this
causes the engine to warm up more
slowly, thereby increasing fuel
consumption and emissions. It is
therefore advisable to move off
immediately, slowly, avoiding high
speeds: in this way the engine will warm
up more quickly.
Unnecessary actions
Avoid revving up when starting at traffic
lights or before stopping the engine. The
latter action, as well as doubledeclutching, is unnecessary and causes
increased fuel consumption and
pollution.
Gear selection
Use a high gear when traffic and road
conditions allow it. Using a low gear for
faster acceleration will increase fuel
consumption. In the same way, improper
use of a high gear increases consumption,
emissions and engine wear.
Max. speed
Fuel consumption considerably increases
as speed increases. Maintain a constant
speed, avoiding unnecessary braking and
acceleration, which cost in terms of both
fuel consumption and emissions.
Acceleration
Accelerating violently severely affects
consumption and emissions: acceleration
should be gradual and should not exceed
the maximum torque.
CONDITIONS OF USE
Cold starting
Short journeys and frequent cold starts
do not allow the engine to reach optimum
operating temperature. This results in a
significant increase in consumption
levels (from +15 to +30% on the urban
cycle) and emissions.
Traffic and road conditions
High fuel consumption is caused by heavy
traffic, for instance when travelling in a
queue with frequent use of low gears or
in cities with many traffic lights. Winding
mountain roads and rough road surfaces
also adversely affect consumption.
Stops in traffic
During prolonged hold-ups (e.g. level
crossings) switch off the engine.
TOWING TRAILERS
126) 127)
TOW HOOK SETUP
Instructions for using the removable
ball head tow hook
IMPORTANT NOTE Before setting off,
check that the removable ball head tow
hook is locked correctly. To do this, check
the following conditions:
the green mark on the knob must
coincide with the green mark on the tow
hook fixing bracket;
the knob must be at the end of its
travel, resting on the tow hook fixing
bracket (no crack);
the lock on the knob must be locked
with the key removed. The knob cannot
be removed;
the tow hook fixing bracket must be
firmly attached to the mounting pipe on
the car. Check by shaking with a hand.
The installation procedure must be
repeated if any of these requirements is
NOT met.
If even only one of the requirements is
not met the tow hook must not be used,
since there is risk of causing accidents.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
The ball head tow hook can be
fitted/removed manually without the
need for specific tools.
137
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT Never use cars or work
tools: the mechanism may be damaged.
IMPORTANT NOTE Do not release the
tow hook when it is attached to a trailer
or cargo-carrier.
IMPORTANT NOTE When driving without
trailer (or without a cargo-carrier), the
ball head tow hook must be removed and
the closing cap must always be inserted
in the hook mounting pipe. This applies
particularly if the tow hook reduces
visibility of the number plate or the
lighting system.
For the electrical connection, a 13 pin
12 V DC connection is to be used
(CUNA/UNI and ISO/DIN Standards).
Follow the instructions provided by the
vehicle Manufacturer and/or the tow
hook Manufacturer.
Installing the tow hook
Before inserting the tow hook, you must
remove the access cover to the tow hook
fixing position under the rear bumper.
Remove the protection cap from the
tow hook mounting pipe fig. 127;
get the tow hook from the luggage
compartment.
127
07216V0001EM
When you take out the tow hook, it is
). You
usually in the released position (
can recognise this position by a crack of
about 0.2 in (5 mm) between the knob
and the tow hook fixing bracket. In
addition, the red mark on the knob should
line up with the green mark on the
bracket, see fig. 128.
Only install the tow hook in these
conditions.
If the tow hook locking system is NOT
pretensioned before installation, or if it is
), pretension it
in the locked position (
by following the “Hook pretensioning”
procedure described at the end of this
paragraph.
The tow hook is in the locked position
when the knob is resting on the bracket
(no crack) and the green mark on the knob
lines up with the green sign on the
bracket fig. 129.
129
07216V0003EM
Position the tow hook so that the delta
inserts on the tow hook fixing bracket are
aligned with the crack between the lower
edge and the mounting pipe on the car
fig. 130;
push the tow hook upwards and the
pretensioned mechanism will
automatically fasten itself in position.
128)
128
138
07216V0002EM
Removing the tow hook
When the tow hook is no longer needed,
disconnect the electrical connections and
remove it from its position as described
below:
remove the protection cap and insert
the key into the lock fig. 133;
open the lock by turning the key fully
clockwise;
130
07216V0004EM
Use the supplied key to close the
mechanism:
insert the key into the lock on the
knob, turn it fully anticlockwise and
remove it;
fasten the protection cap onto the
lock.
IMPORTANT The key can only be
removed when the locking mechanism is
closed (
).
131
07216V0007EM
once you have lowered the protection
cover, insert the trailer’s plug into the
socket on the car. To make sure that the
two connectors fit together perfectly,
check that the tab on the plug is aligned
with the notch on the socket fig. 132;
insert the plug fully into the socket and
enable the safety lock, if provided.
07216V0009EM
grab the tow hook and move the knob
away from the fixing bracket by pulling it
in the direction indicated by the arrow A
fig. 134;
to release the hook, turn the knob
clockwise B, until the red mark on the
knob lines up with the green mark on the
bracket;
IMPORTANT To prevent losing the key
while towing, DO NOT leave it in the lock.
Remove the ball protection cover from
the tow hook and attach the trailer.
Connecting the electrical system
To connect the trailer’s electrical system,
proceed as described below:
turn the connector mounting bracket
downwards. The bracket is to the left of
the tow hook mounting pipe fig. 131;
133
132
07216V0008EM
139
STARTING AND DRIVING
fasten the cover onto the electrical
connector and push the mount upwards;
fit the cover onto the rear bumper.
134
07216V0010EM
remove the tow hook from its position
fig. 135;
insert the protection cap into the tow
hook mounting pipe on the car;
135
The tow hook and the socket for
connecting the trailer lights are fixed to
each other and are located behind the
rear bumper when they are not in use.
137
07216V0015EM
During operation, the position of the
whole device (hook plus electrical socket)
is controlled by button 1 fig. 138 on the
right-hand luggage compartment trim.
07216V0011EM
clean the tow hook and remove any
residues, especially from the ends;
fit the protection cover onto the ball;
insert the tow hook into its case and
put it back inside the luggage
compartment;
140
Pretensioning the tow hook
If necessary, pretension the locking
mechanism as described below:
remove the cap from the lock on the
knob and insert the key provided;
turn the key fully clockwise fig. 136;
pull the knob out in the direction
indicated by the arrow A;
turn the knob fully clockwise B. The
locking mechanism will remain
pretensioned even when the knob is
released.
The tow hook, with pretensioned locking
), is now
mechanism (knob position
ready to be installed on the car.
ELECTRICALLY DRIVEN TOW HOOK
136
07216V0012EM
138
04056V0060EM
Its status can be changed from unused to
operational only if:
the handbrake is engaged or the shift
lever is in the P position;
the engine is off;
the tailgate is open.
There is a LED on the button 1, which may
be in one of the following states:
LED off: indicates that at least one of
the above conditions is not met, or the
trailer light wiring is connected to the
socket.
LED flashing: indicates that the tow
hook is moving or that the system must
be initialised;
LED on fixed: indicates that the tow
hook can be moved.
Safe opening and closing of the tow hook
is guaranteed by a protection system
that can stop and reverse its movement
when it encounters an obstacle while
opening or closing.
The system must be initialised after the
battery has been disconnected, the
movement has been blocked by a
physical obstacle or if the safety system
has intervened three times
consecutively.
System initialisation
In the conditions of movement described
above, press the movement button 1 for
at least 10 seconds. The LED will turn on
to confirm the initialisation.
IMPORTANT When the tow hook is not in
use, put it in the closed position.
141
STARTING AND DRIVING
ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE
The tow hook structure must be secured to the body in the points shown in the fig. 139.
Dimension D (see the figure): with the vehicle fully loaded: 330.35 mm, with the vehicle unladen: 350 to 420 mm
139
IMPORTANT Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to install a tow hook.
142
07226V0040EM
WARNING
126) The ABS with which the car is equipped
will not control the braking system of the
trailer. Particular caution is required on
slippery roads.
127) Do not, under any circumstances,
modify the vehicle's braking system to
control the trailer breaking system. The
towing braking system must be completely
independent of the vehicle's hydraulic
system.
128) To avoid damage to your hands, keep
them away from the knob while inserting the
tow hook into position on the car bracket.
143
This page is intentionally left blank
IN AN EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANGING A BULB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REPLACING FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANGING A WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIRE REPAIR KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RUN FLAT TYRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION GEAR LEVER UNLOCKING
BROKEN-DOWN VEHICLE TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOWING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A punctured tyre or a burnt-out bulb?
At times, a problem may interfere with our journey.
The pages on emergencies can help you to deal with critical
situations independently and with calm.
In an emergency we recommend that you call the freephone
number found in the Warranty Booklet.
You can also use the universal, national or international freephone
number to find your nearest Alfa Romeo Dealership.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.146
.146
.151
.157
.160
.163
.163
.165
.165
.166
.166
IN AN EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS
CONTROL
54)
Press the fig. 140 button to switch the
hazard warning lights on/off.
When the hazard warning lights are on,
the and warning lights flash.
When you need to move away from the
vehicle to look for help, the hazard
warning lights will continue flashing even
if the ignition device is in the STOP
position.
Emergency braking
The hazard lights are switched on and
warning lights and appear on the
instrument panel in case of emergency
braking and according to the mode
selected by the “Alfa DNA™” selector.
When the "Alfa DNA™" selector is in
position "n" or "a", the activation
threshold of the hazard warning lights is
higher; on the other hand, in position "d"
the sensitivity of the activation is lower
than that in the "n" and "a" modes.
The lights switch off automatically when
emergency braking ceases.
IMPORTANT
54) A prolonged use of the hazard warning
lights may discharge the battery.
140
08016V0001EM
IMPORTANT The use of hazard warning
lights is governed by the highway code of
the country you are driving in: comply
with legal requirements.
146
CHANGING A BULB
129) 130) 131) 132)
55)
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Before replacing a bulb check the
contacts for oxidation;
replace blown bulbs with others of the
same type and power;
after replacing a headlight bulb,
always check its alignment;
when a light is not working, check that
the corresponding fuse is intact before
changing the bulb. For the location of
fuses, refer to the paragraph "If a fuse
blows" in this chapter.
IMPORTANT In some particular climate
conditions such as low teperature,
humidity or after washing the car, a thin
condensation layer may form on the
internal surfaces of the front and rear
headlights. This is a natural phenomenon
due to the difference in temperature and
humidity between the inside and the
outside of the transparent cover which
does not indicate a fault and does not
compromise the normal operation of
lighting devices. It will disappear during
normal use.
TYPES OF BULBS
The car is equipped with the following bulbs
Glass bulbs (type A): they are press-fitted. Pull to extract.
Bayonet-type bulbs (type B): to remove them from their holder, press
the bulb and turn it anticlockwise, then extract it.
Tubular bulbs (type C): release them from their contacts to remove.
Halogen bulbs (type D): to remove the bulb, turn the connector to the
side and pull it out.
Halogen bulbs (type E): to remove the bulb, turn it anticlockwise.
Xenon gas discharge bulb (type F): to remove the bulb, contact an Alfa
Romeo Dealership.
147
IN AN EMERGENCY
Light bulbs
Type
Main beam headlights, front side lights/daylight running lights
(DRL) (*)
H15
55/15W
D
Dipped beam headlights (*)
H7
55W
D
Front direction indicators (*)
PY24W
24W
B
Fog lights(*)
H11
55W
E
Main beam/dipped beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge)
D3S
35W
F
Sun visor light
1.5CP
2.1W
C
Glove compartment light
W5W
4W
A
Boot ceiling light
W5W
5W
A
Puddle lights (under door panel)
W5W
5W
A
(*) Only for basic version headlight with halogen main beam/dipped beam headlights
148
Power
Figure reference
REPLACING AN EXTERNAL BULB
Front light cluster with main
beam/dipped beam halogen headlights
remove the bulb/connector assembly
from the headlight body fig. 143;
Dipped beam headlights
To change the bulb of these lights,
proceed as follows:
working inside the engine
compartment fig. 141;
144
143
141
08026V0023EM
remove the cover fig. 142;
08026V0003EM
remove the bulb by sliding it off the
connector;
install the new bulb, making sure it is
correctly inserted in the connector;
then insert the bulb/connector
assembly in the housing on the headlight
body and make sure that it is locked
correctly;
remount the lid and cover, tightening
the fixing bolts.
Main beam headlights
To change the bulb of these lights,
proceed as follows:
working inside the engine
compartment fig. 144;
142
08026V0023EM
remove the cover fig. 145;
145
08026V0004EM
turn the bulb, bulb holder and
connector assembly anticlockwise and
then slide it off the headlight body
fig. 146;
08026V0002EM
149
IN AN EMERGENCY
146
08026V0005EM
remove the bulb by sliding it off the
bulb holder;
install the new bulb, making sure it is
correctly inserted in the bulb holder;
then insert the bulb, bulb holder and
connector assembly in the housing on the
headlight body and turn it clockwise,
making sure that it is locked correctly;
refit the protective cover.
Direction indicators
To change the bulb of these lights,
proceed as follows:
working inside the engine
compartment fig. 147;
150
147
08026V0023EM
remove the cover by turning it fig. 148;
148
08026V0006EM
release the bulb, bulb holder and
connector assembly and then slide it off
the headlight body fig. 149;
149
08026V0007EM
remove the bulb by sliding it off the
bulb holder;
install the new bulb, making sure it is
correctly inserted in the bulb holder;
then insert the bulb, bulb holder and
connector assembly in the housing on the
headlight body and turn it clockwise,
making sure that it is locked correctly;
refit the protective cover.
Fog lights
(where provided)
To replace the fog lights, contact an Alfa
Romeo Dealership
Front light cluster with main
beam/dipped beam Xenon gas
discharge headlights
To replace the bulbs of the main beam
headlights/dipped headlights contact an
Alfa Romeo Dealership
REPLACING FUSES
WARNING
INTRODUCTION
129) Before replacing the bulb, wait for the
exhaust ducts to cool down: DANGER OF
SCALDING!
130) Modifications or repairs to the electric
system that are not carried out properly or
do not take the system technical
specifications into account can cause
malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.
131) Halogen bulbs contain pressurised gas,
in the case of breakage they may burst
causing glass fragments to be projected
outwards.
132) Only replace the light bulbs when the
engine is off and in a position that does not
interfere with traffic and lets you safely
replace them (see the description in the
“Replacement” paragraph). Also ensure that
the engine is cold, to prevent the risk of
burns.
133) 134) 135) 136) 137)
56) 57)
Fuses protect the electrical system: they
intervene (blow) in the event of a failure
or improper action on the system.
Fuse extracting pliers
To replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked
to the boot fusebox cover fig. 150.
Grab the pliers from the upper tabs,
press them and extract the pliers pulling
upwards.
08036S0005EM
After use, refit the pliers in position,
proceeding as follows:
grasp the pliers from the upper tabs;
press the pliers in their housing,
pushing downwards, until they click into
place.
FUSE LOCATION
The fuses, which can be replaced by the
user, are grouped in two boxes below the
passenger side foot board and inside the
boot.
IMPORTANT
55) Halogen bulbs must be handled holding
the metallic part only. Touching the
transparent part of the bulb with your
fingers may reduce the intensity of the
emitted light and even reduce the lifespan of
the bulb. In the event of accidental contact,
wipe the bulb with a cloth moistened with
alcohol and let the bulb dry.
151
CONTROL UNIT UNDER PASSENGER
SIDE FOOTBOARD
150
08036V0053EM
The pliers fig. 151 have two different
ends, specifically designed to remove the
different types of fuses present in the
vehicle:
1: MINI fuse;
2: J-CASE fuse.
To access the fuses, proceed as follows:
lift the upper end of the footboard 1
fig. 152 on the passenger side, pulling it
to release the 2 buttons;
151
IN AN EMERGENCY
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX
To access the fuses, proceed as follows:
remove the cover located on the right
side of the compartment;
remove the control unit cover fig. 154;
152
08036V0010EM
remove the panel 2 fig. 153 extracting
it downward, after unscrewing the two
fixing hooks;
154
08036V0014EM
The number identifying the electrical
component corresponding to each fuse is
shown on the cover.
After replacing a fuse, make sure that
you have closed cover correctly.
153
08036V0011EM
the fuses are freely accessible on the
control unit.
The number identifying the electrical
component corresponding to each fuse is
shown on the control unit cover.
152
CONTROL UNIT UNDER PASSENGER SIDE FOOTBOARD
155
08036S0013EM
FUNCTION
FUSE
AMPERE
Front electric window (driver side)
F33
25
Front electric window (passenger side)
F34
25
Power supply for Connect system, Climate Control system, Alarm,
Electric door mirror folding, EOBD system, USB port
F36
15
Power Lock Device (Driver side door unlocking - where
provided)/Door unlocking, Central locking
F38
20
Windscreen washer pump
F43
20
153
IN AN EMERGENCY
FUNCTION
FUSE
AMPERE
Rear left electric window
F47
25
Rear right electric window
F48
25
Heater rear window coil, cigar lighter
F94
15
154
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX
156
08036V0015EM
FUNCTION
FUSE
AMPERE
Tow hook module (TTM/TTEBM)
F01
40
Hi-Fi system
F08
30
I-Drive / USB Socket / AUX / USB Charger
F21
10
KL15/a 12V Power socket in the luggage compartment
F22
20
155
IN AN EMERGENCY
FUNCTION
FUSE
AMPERE
Trailer light control unit power supply (+30)
F1
20
Trailer light control unit power supply (+30)
F2
15
Trailer socket (only EMEA) (+30)
F3
10
Tow bar (+15)
F4
10
156
CHANGING A WHEEL
WARNING
133) Never replace a fuse with another with
a higher amp rating; DANGER OF FIRE.
134) Before replacing a fuse, make sure
that the ignition device is at STOP and that
all devices are switched off and/or
disconnected.
135) Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership if a
safety system (airbags, brakes),
transmission system (engine, gearbox) or
steering system general protection fuse
blows.
136) If a fuse blows again, contact an Alfa
Romeo Dealership.
137) If a general protective fuse
(MAXI-FUSE, MEGA-FUSE, MIDI-FUSE)
blows, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
IMPORTANT
56) Never replace a fuse with metal wires or
anything else.
57) If it is necessary to wash the engine
compartment, take care not to directly hit
the fuse box and the window wiper motors
with the water jet.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
The car is equipped with the "Tire Repair
Kit": see the “Tire Repair Kit” paragraph
for how to use this device.
As an alternative to the “Tire Repair Kit”,
the car may be requested with a
space-saver wheel: see the instructions
on the following pages for changing the
wheel.
JACK
138) 139)
Please note that:
the jack weighs about 4.4 lb (2 kg);
the jack requires no adjustment;
the jack cannot be repaired and in the
event of a fault it must be replaced by
another genuine one;
no tool other than its cranking device
may be fitted on the jack.
Jack maintenance:
prevent any dirt from depositing on
the "worm screw";
keep the "worm screw" lubricated;
never modify the jack.
Conditions in which not to use the jack:
temperatures below −40°F (-40°C);
on sandy or muddy ground;
on uneven ground;
on steep slopes in extreme weather
conditions: thunderstorms, typhoons,
hurricanes, blizzards, storms, etc.;
in direct contact with the engine or for
repairs under the car;
on boats.
CHANGING PROCEDURE
140) 141) 142) 143) 144) 145) 146)
58) 59)
Proceed as follows:
stop the car in a position that is not
dangerous for oncoming traffic where
you can change the wheel safely.
The ground must be flat and
sufficiently compact;
stop the engine, engage the hazard
warning lights and the parking brake;
engage P (Park) mode;
wear the reflective safety jacket
(compulsory by law) before getting out of
the car;
open the luggage compartment and lift
up the mat using the handle;
when the situation dictates it (for your
own safety and to comply with the
regulations in force in the country where
you are), take the warning triangle and
position it at a suitable distance from the
car;
unscrew the locking device 1 fig. 157,
take out the space-saver wheel and the
inflation compressor;
157
IN AN EMERGENCY
lift the extension lever 2 on the wrench
3;
157
160
08066V0010EM
remove the damaged wheel by taking
the wrench 3 fig. 158 and loosening the
fixing bolts by about one turn; Shake the
car to help detach the rim from the wheel
hub;
159
158
08066V0012EM
position the jack 4 fig. 159 under the
car, near the wheel to be changed, taking
care not to damage the plastic
aerodynamic guard;
158
08066V0013EM
turn the extension lever 2 clockwise
until the round pin on the jack engages in
the hole in the lifting block located about
6 in (15 cm) from the outside edge of the
body. The lifting points 5 can be seen in
, visible
fig. 159 marked by a triangle
on the aerodynamic guard fig. 160;
09056V0001EM
warn anybody nearby that the car is
about to be raised;
they should stay clear and they should
be warned not to touch the car until it is
back on the ground;
turn the extension lever 2 until the
wheel is a few centimetres off the
ground;
remove the five wheel fastening bolts
and take the wheel off;
make sure the contact surfaces
between space-saver wheel and hub are
clean so that the fastening bolts will not
come loose;
fit the space-saver wheel by inserting
the first bolt for two threads into the hole
closest to the valve;
take the wrench 3 and fully tighten the
fixing bolts;
inflate the space-saver wheel by
removing the cap from its inflation valve
and screwing on the compressor inflation
hose fitting 6 fig. 161;
make sure that the switch 8 on the
compressor 6 is in the 0 (off) position,
open the rear hatch and insert the plug
into the power socket in the luggage
compartment or on the central tunnel and
start the engine. Put the switch 8 in the I
(on) position;
wheel. Do not use it for inflating
mattresses, rafts, etc.
operate the extension lever 2 on the
jack 4 to lower the car;
then remove the jack 4;
use the wrench 3 to fully tighten the
bolts, passing alternately from one bolt
to the diagonally opposite one.
When replacing an alloy wheel, it is
advisable to place it upside down, with
the aesthetic part facing upwards.
WARNING
161
08066V0011EM
inflate the space-saver wheel to a
pressure of 43.5 psi (3 bar);
IMPORTANT To conserve the battery
charge, it is recommended to leave the
vehicle running for the entire inflation
process.
To obtain a more accurate reading, it is
advisable to check the pressure of the
space-saver wheel on the pressure gauge
7 with the compressor off.
The compressor was designed
exclusively for inflating the space-saver
138) The jack may be used to replace
wheels only on the car that it comes with or
other cars of the same model. Never use the
jack for other purposes, such as lifting other
vehicle models. Never use it for repair
operations under the vehicle. Incorrect
positioning of the jack may cause the vehicle
to fall. Do not use the jack for loads higher
than the one shown on its label.
139) The jack is a tool developed and
designed only for changing a wheel, if a tyre
gets punctured or damaged, on the vehicle
with which it is supplied or on other vehicles
of the same model. Any other use, e.g. to jack
up other vehicle models or different things,
is strictly prohibited. Never use for
maintenance or repair activities under the
car or to exchange the summer/winter
wheels and vice versa. Never go under the
raised vehicle. Should it be necessary to
work under the vehicle, contact an Alfa
Romeo Dealership. Incorrect positioning of
the jack may cause the raised vehicle to fall:
use only in the positions indicated. Do not
use the jack for loads higher than the one
shown on its label. Never start the engine
with vehicle raised. If the vehicle is raised
more than necessary, everything can
become more unstable, with the risk of the
vehicle dropping violently. Thus, lift the
vehicle only as needed in order to access the
spare wheel.
140) The space-saver wheel is specific for
your car. Do not use it on cars of different
models. Do not use space-saver wheels of
different models on your car. The
space-saver wheel must only be used in the
event of an emergency. Never use it for more
than strictly necessary and never exceed
80 km/h. On the space-saver wheel there is
an orange label, summarising the main
warnings regarding space-saver wheel
usage restrictions. Never remove or cover
the label. Never apply any hub cap to the
space-saver wheel.
159
IN AN EMERGENCY
141) Alert other drivers that the car is
stationary in compliance with local
regulations: hazard warning lights, warning
triangle, etc. Any passengers on board
should leave the car, especially if it is heavily
laden. Passengers should stay away from
on-coming traffic while the wheel is being
changed. On hills or uneven roads, use
chocks or appropriate objects to block the
wheels of the vehicle.
142) If left in the passenger compartment,
the punctured wheel and jack constitute a
serious risk to the safety of occupants in the
event of accidents or sharp braking.
Therefore, always place both the jack and
punctured wheel in the dedicated housing in
the boot.
143) It is extremely dangerous to attempt
to change a wheel on the side of the vehicle
next to the driving lane: make sure that the
vehicle is at a sufficient distance from the
road, to avoid being run over.
144) Alert other drivers that the car is
stationary in compliance with local
regulations: hazard warning lights, warning
triangle, etc. Any passengers on board
should leave the car, especially if it is heavily
laden. Passengers should stay away from
on-coming traffic while the wheel is being
changed.
145) Never tamper with the inflation valve.
Never introduce tools of any kind between
the rim and the tyre. Check tyre and
space-saver wheel pressures regularly,
complying with the values given in the
"Technical specifications" chapter.
160
146) The spare wheel must only be used in
an emergency. Never use it for more than
strictly necessary and never exceed
80 km/h. On the wheel there is an orange
sticker, summarising the main warnings
regarding wheel usage restrictions. Never
remove or cover the label. The label contains
the following indications in four languages:
"Warning! For temporary use only! 80 km/h
max! Replace with standard wheel as soon
as possible. Never cover this indication."
Never apply a wheel cap on the wheel. The
driving characteristics of the car will be
modified with the wheel fitted. Avoid violent
acceleration and braking, abrupt steering
and fast cornering. Have the wheel repaired
and refitted as soon as possible. Using two
or more spare wheels at the same time is
forbidden. Do not apply grease to the bolt
threads before fitting: they could come
unscrewed.
IMPORTANT
58) When turning the jack handle make sure
that it can turn freely without scraping your
hand against the ground. The moving
components of the jack ("worm screw" and
joints) can also cause injuries: avoid touching
them. If you come into contact with
lubricating grease, clean yourself
thoroughly.
59) Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as
soon as possible to have the correct
tightening of the wheel bolts checked.
TIRE REPAIR KIT
DESCRIPTION
147) 148) 149) 150) 151) 152) 153) 154) 155) 156)
60)
3)
The Tire Repair Kit is located in the
luggage compartment, inside a dedicated
container marked with the Alfa Romeo
logo.
To access the Tire Repair Kit, open the
boot, lift the load platform.
The Tire Repair Kit includes also:
a cannister 1 fig. 162 containing the
sealant, equipped with filling hose 2;
a compressor 4 complete with
pressure gauge, fittings and an adhesive
label 3 with the words Max. 80 km/h”, to
be attached in a position easily visible to
the driver (eg. on the dashboard) after
repairing the tyre;
some adaptors, for inflating different
elements.
regulations in force in the country where
you are), take the warning triangle from
the luggage compartment and position it
at a suitable distance from the car.
put on the gloves, connect the hose 5
fig. 163 to the cannister 1 using the
fitting 6. Unscrew the tyre valve cap and
screw the filler hose ring nut 2 onto the
tyre valve;
162
164
08066V0002EM
IMPORTANT The sealing liquid is
effective for outside temperatures
between -40°F and +122°F (-40°C and
+50°C). The sealant has an expiry date.
08066V0005EM
insert the plug into the socket in the
passenger compartment or in the
luggage compartment fig. 165 and start
the engine;
REPAIR PROCEDURE
147) 148) 149) 150) 151) 152) 153) 154) 155) 156)
Proceed as follows:
stop the car in a position that is not
dangerous for oncoming traffic where
you can repair the tyre safely, as far as
possible from the side of the road;
turn on the hazard warning lights;
engage the electric parking brake;
engage P (Park) mode;
stop the engine and put on the
reflective safety jacket (for your own
safety and to comply with the regulations
in force in the country where you are)
before getting out of the car.
when the situation requires it (for your
own safety and to comply with the
163
08066V0004EM
make sure that the switch 7
fig. 164 on the compressor 4 is in the 0
(off) position;
165
08066V0006EM
start the compressor by putting the
switch 7 fig. 164 in the I (on) position;
inflate the tyre to a pressure of at
least 32 psi (2.2 bar). In order to obtain a
more precise reading, check the pressure
value on pressure gauge 8 with the
compressor off;
161
IN AN EMERGENCY
if a pressure of at least 26 psi (1.8 bar)
is not reached within 15 minutes, the tyre
is too damaged to be repaired. Do not
continue driving, but contact an Alfa
Romeo Dealership;
after having driven for about 5 miles
(8 km), stop, engage the electric parking
brake and recheck the tyre pressure;
if the measured pressure is unchanged
(32 psi (2.2 bar)), continue driving to an
Alfa Romeo Dealership;
if the measured pressure is between
19 and 30.5 psi (1.3 and 2.1 bar), restore
pressure to 32 psi (2.2 bar), continue
driving to an Alfa Romeo Dealership;
if the measured pressure is lower than
19 psi (1.3 bar), the tyre is too damaged
to be repaired. Do not continue driving,
but contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
IMPORTANT Only use original tyre repair
cannisters, which can be purchased at an
Alfa Romeo Dealership.
IMPORTANT To conserve the battery
charge, it is recommended to leave the
vehicle running for the entire inflation
process.
162
WARNING
147) Punctures on the sides of the tire may
not be repaired. Do not use the Tire Repair
kit if the tyre was damaged as a result of
being used when underinflated.
148) Always wear protective gloves before
proceeding with the operation.
149) Apply the adhesive label where it can
be easily seen by the driver as a reminder
that the tyre has been treated with the Tire
Repair Kit. Drive carefully, particularly on
bends. Do not exceed 80 km/h. Avoid sudden
acceleration or braking.
150) You must always indicate that the tyre
was repaired using the Tire Repair Kit.
151) Repairs are not possible in the case of
damage to the wheel rim (bad groove
distortion causing air loss). Do not remove
foreign bodies (screws or nails) from the
tyre.
152) Never operate the compressor for
longer than 20 consecutive minutes. Risk of
overheating. The Tire Repair Kit is not
suitable for definitive repairs, so the
repaired tyres may only be used temporarily.
153) As required by current regulations, the
information on chemical substances for the
protection of human health and the
environment and on the safe use of the
sealing fluid are on the cannister label.
Compliance with the indications on the label
is an essential condition to ensure the safety
and the effectiveness of the product.
Remember to carefully read the label before
use; the user of the product is responsible
for any damages caused by improper use.
The sealing fluid has an expiry date. Replace
the bottle if the sealant has expired.
154) If the pressure falls below 1.3 bar, do
not drive any further: the Tire Repair Kit
cannot guarantee proper seal because the
tyre is too damaged. Contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
155) The Tire Repair Kit provide a
temporary repair, therefore the tyre must be
examined and repaired by a specialist as
soon as possible. The sealant is suitable for
use at temperatures in the range from −40°C
to +50°C.
156) Indicate the presence of the stationary
car in accordance with current regulations:
hazard warning lights, warning triangle, etc.
Those on board should get out of the vehicle
and wait for the wheel to be repaired away
from the threat posed by the traffic. If
parked on a slope or rough surface, chock
the wheels with wedges or other suitable
devices (for the correct procedure for
parking the car safely, refer to the "Parking"
paragraph in the "Starting and driving"
chapter).
IMPORTANT
60) In the event of a puncture caused by
foreign bodies, the kit may be used to repair
tyres showing damage on the tyre tread up
to max. 6mm diameter.
IMPORTANT
3) Dispose of the bottle and the sealant
liquid properly. Have them disposed of in
compliance with national and local
regulations.
RUN FLAT TYRES
JUMP STARTING
(where provided)
157) 158) 159)
"Run Flat" tyres allow you to maintain
control of the car after a puncture and to
continue driving safely for about 50 mi
(80 km) at a maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
The reinforced tyre wall retains its shape
and supports the weight of the car in the
event of pressure loss.
Cars equipped with Run Flat tyres are
NOT provided with Tire Repair Kits. For
repair, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership
as soon as possible.
WARNING
157) Do not exceed the maximum distance
or speed (80 km - 80 km/h) in the event of
pressure loss-puncture.
158) A pressure loss alters the driving
behaviour of the car, for example, causing
less directional stability when braking,
longer braking distances and altered
steering geometry. Therefore, adjust your
driving style to avoid sudden turns or
obstacles such as pavements and potholes.
159) Do not exceed 60 km/h when driving
with an especially heavy trailer.
If the battery is flat, a jump starting can
be performed using the battery and the
cables of another vehicle, or using an
auxiliary battery. In all cases, the battery
used must have a capacity equal to or a
little higher than the flat one.
Jump starting may be dangerous if
carried out incorrectly: carefully follow
the procedures described below.
61)
166
08076V0006EM
You can access the positive terminal (+)
by lifting the protective flap fig. 167.
IMPORTANT NOTES
Do not use an auxiliary battery or any
other source of external supply with a
voltage above 12 V: the battery, the
starter, the alternator and the electrical
system of the vehicle could be damaged.
Do not attempt jump starting if the
battery is frozen. The battery could break
and explode!
REMOTE BATTERY CONNECTION
POLES
To facilitate the operation, the remote
poles of the battery for the jump starting
can be found in the engine compartment:
the battery, on the other hand, is placed
in the luggage compartment.
The negative terminal (-) fig. 166 is
positioned next to the right bonnet lock.
167
08076V0002EM
The pole is shown in fig. 168.
163
IN AN EMERGENCY
IMPORTANT If the auxiliary battery is
installed on another vehicle, check that
there is no accidental contact of metal
parts between the two vehicles, since an
earth connection may result, with the risk
of serious injury to any people who may
be nearby.
168
08076V0001EM
To carry out the operation, you need to
have the correct cables to connect the
auxiliary battery to the remote poles of
the flat battery. Usually, these cables
have terminals at the ends and are
identified by different sheath colours
(red = positive, black = negative).
JUMP STARTING
160) 161) 162)
Proceed as follows:
switch off all electrical devices in the
car;
engage the parking brake, actiate P
(Park) mode and put the starter switch in
the STOP position;
should you be using the battery of
another car, park the other car within the
range of the cables used for the
connection, operate the parking brake
and ensure that its ignition is off.
164
IMPORTANT If the procedure below is
carried out incorrectly, it can cause
severe injury to people or damage the
recharging system of one or both
vehicles. Carefully follow the instructions
given below.
Cable connection
62)
Proceed as follows to carry out a jump
starting:
connect a terminal on the end of the
positive cable from the remote positive
pole (+) of the car with flat battery;
connect the terminal on the opposite
end of the positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) pole of the auxiliary battery;
connect a negative cable end terminal
to the negative (-) pole of the auxiliary
battery;
connect the terminal on the opposite
end of the negative (-) cable to the earth
point (-) on the car with the battery flat;
start the engine of the car with an
auxiliary battery, let it run for some
minutes at idle and then start the engine
of the car with flat battery. In case a
portable battery is used, before starting
the car, wait a few seconds after
completing the connection.
Cable disconnection
Once the engine is started, remove the
connection cables in reverse sequence,
as shown below:
disconnect the negative cable end
terminal (-) from the earth point (-) of the
car with flat battery;
disconnect the terminal on the
opposite end of the negative cable from
the negative (-) pole of the auxiliary
battery;
disconnect the terminal on the
opposite end of the positive (+) cable
from the positive (+) pole of the auxiliary
battery;
disconnect the terminal on the end of
the positive cable from the remote
positive pole (+) of the car with flat
battery.
WARNING
160) Do not get too close to the radiator
cooling fan: the electric fan may start;
danger of injury. Scarves, ties and other
loose clothing might be pulled by moving
parts.
161) Remove any metal objects (e.g. rings,
watches, bracelets), that might cause an
accidental electrical contact and cause
serious injury.
162) The batteries contain acid that can
burn skin or eyes. Batteries produce
hydrogen, which is easily flammable and
explosive. Thus keep away flames or devices
which may cause sparks.
IMPORTANT
61) Never use a fast battery-charger to
start the engine as this could damage the
electronic systems of your vehicle,
particularly the ignition and engine fuel
supply control units.
62) Do not connect the cable to the negative
terminal (–) of the flat battery. The following
spark could lead to battery explosion and
cause serious harm. Only use the specific
earth point; do not use any other exposed
metallic part.
FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
Depending on the type and violence of
the impact, the control unit of the ORC
occupant protection systems determines
whether to activate the airbags and the
front seat belt pretensioners and
whether to immediately interrupt the
current from the batteries to the supply
pumps and to the devices that operate
the engine. The power from the battery is
interrupted by "skipping" the pyrotechnic
fuse placed on the fusebox next to the
positive pole of the battery.
When the fuse is "skipped", only some
services, necessary for the safety of the
car (eg: door locks, anti-theft device, etc.),
remain powered.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
GEAR LEVER UNLOCKING
To release the automatic transmission
lever, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
IMPORTANT After the impact, carefully
check the car for fuel leaks, for instance
in the engine compartment, under the car
or near the tank area.
IMPORTANT Contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership to have the system checked.
165
IN AN EMERGENCY
BROKEN-DOWN VEHICLE
TOWING
REAR WHEEL DRIVE (RWD) VERSIONS
It is recommended to tow the vehicle
with all four wheels lifted from the
ground on the platform of a roadside
assistance vehicle.
If a breakdown truck with platform is not
available, the vehicle must be towed with
the rear wheels LIFTED from the ground
(using a trailer or special equipment
allowing lifting of the rear wheels).
IMPORTANT Towing vehicles without
complying with the above mentioned
prescriptions can cause serious damage
to the vehicle.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) VERSIONS
It is recommended to tow the vehicle
with all four wheels lifted from the
ground on the platform of a roadside
assistance vehicle.
IMPORTANT Avoid lifting the front (or
rear) wheels only, using a trailer or
vehicle that allows lifting the wheels of
one axle only. Lifting the front (or rear)
wheels only while towing might damage
the transmission or the transfer unit.
IMPORTANT If a vehicle is towed without
complying with the above requirements,
the transmission and/or the transfer unit
might be seriously damaged. Damage due
to incorrect towing is not covered by
warranty.
TOWING THE VEHICLE
163) 164)
In order to be able to tow the vehicle,
which has been in an accident or has
broken down, on the road surface and
only for short distances, a tow hook is
provided in the tools container inside the
boot.
Proceed as follows to use the tow hook:
unhook the cap fig. 169 on the front or
rear bumper (where provided)
fig. 170 pressing on the upper part;
169
166
08136V0001EM
WARNING
170
08136V0003EM
take the tow hook from its housing in
the boot and carefully clean the threaded
housing on the vehicle before using it;
tighten the vehicle's tow hook in its
place for about 11 turns.
IMPORTANT The largest work angle of
the cable to fix on the tow hook must not
exceed 15°, as shown in fig. 171.
171
163) Move the ignition device to ON and
then to STOP, without opening the door.
164) The brake servo and the
electromechanical power steering will not
work while the vehicle is being towed. You
will therefore need to apply more force on
the brake pedal and steering wheel. Do not
use flexible ropes when towing, and avoid
jerky movements. While towing, make sure
that the trailer hitch does not damage any
components it is touching. When towing the
car, you must comply with all specific traffic
regulations and adopt an appropriate
driving behaviour. Do not start the engine
while towing the vehicle. Before tightening
the ring, clean the threaded housing
thoroughly. Make sure that the ring is fully
screwed into the housing before towing the
car.
08136V0002EM
167
This page is intentionally left blank
SERVICING AND CARE
SCHEDULED SERVICING . .
ENGINE COMPARTMENT. .
BATTERY RECHARGING . .
SERVICING PROCEDURES .
LIFTING THE VEHICLE . . .
WHEELS AND TYRES . . . .
BODYWORK. . . . . . . . . .
Correct servicing permits the performance of the vehicle to be
maintained over time, as well as limiting running costs and
safeguarding the efficiency of the safety systems.
This chapter explains how.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.170
.177
.184
.185
.187
.188
.189
SERVICING AND CARE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
REGULARCHECKS
Correct servicing is crucial for
guaranteeing a long life for the vehicle
under the best conditions.
For this reason, Alfa Romeo has planned
a series of checks and maintenance
operations at fixed distance intervals
and, for versions/markets, where
provided, at fixed time intervals, as
described in the Service Schedule.
Before each service, it is always
necessary to carefully follow the
instructions in the Scheduled Servicing
Plan (e.g. periodically check level of
fluids, tyre pressure, etc.).
Scheduled Servicing is offered by an Alfa
Romeo Dealership according to a set
time schedule. If, during each operation,
in addition to the ones scheduled, the
need arises for further replacements or
repairs, these may be carried out with the
owner's explicit consent only.
IMPORTANT Scheduled Servicing
operations are required by the
Manufacturer. Failure to have them
carried out may invalidate the warranty.
It is advisable to inform the Alfa Romeo
Dealership of any small operating
irregularities without waiting for the next
service.
Everyyearor620miles(1,000km)or
beforelongjourneys,checkandtopup,if
necessary:
enginecoolantlevel;
brakefluidlevel(ifinsufficient,seean
AlfaRomeodealershipassoonas
possible);
lowAdBluedieselemissionsadditive
(UREA)levelwarning(2.2JTDversions
only);
windscreen washer fluid level;
tyre inflation pressure and condition;
operation of lighting system
(headlights,directionindicators,hazard
warninglights,etc.);
operationofscreenwashing/wiping
systemandpositioning/wearofwiper
blades.
} ţ
}Ť ~
1860miles(3,000km)
}Ť }Φ
ƻ }Ɠ
ƻ}}} ƻ} }
}}ƻ} }
} ~ơţ
ť
}Ŧ
Ť}Φ}ǙƓǚ
ΦǜƓǝơơ}~Ɠ
}Ŧ
}}
} Ŧ
}
} Ŧ
thefollowingchecksmustbecarriedout
moreoftenthanindicatedinthe
ScheduledServicingPlan:
checkfrontandreardiscbrakepad
conditionandwear;
checkcleanlinessofbonnetand
tailgatelocks,cleanlinessandlubrication
oflinkage;
visuallyinspectconditionsof:engine,
gearbox,transmission,pipesandhoses
(exhaust/fuelsystem/brakes)andrubber
elements(gaiters/sleeves/bushes,etc.);
checkbatterychargeandbatteryfluid
level(electrolyte);
visuallyinspectconditionsofthe
accessorydrivebelts;
checkand,ifnecessary,changeengine
oilandreplaceoilfilter;
checkand,ifnecessary,replacepollen
filter;
checkand,ifnecessary,replaceair
cleaner;
checkand,ifnecessary,replacethe
BadFuelfilter(whereprovided).
170
SERVICE SCHEDULE (2.0 T4 MAir petrol engine versions)
IMPORTANT Once you have carried out the last intervention in the table, continue with the scheduled servicing, maintaining the
frequency indicated in the plan by marking each operation with a dot or dedicated note. Warning: simply restarting the maintenance
from the start of the plan may cause the allowed interval to be exceeded for some operations!
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
120
135
150
Thousands of miles
9
18
27
36
45
54
63
72
81
90
Years
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Check battery charge status with the proper instrument
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check tyre condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary.
Check quick tyre repair kit recharge conditions/expiry date
(if provided)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction
indicators, hazard warning lights, boot, passenger
compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning
lights, etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check exhaust emissions
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check the supply/engine control and emissions systems
operation using the diagnosis equipment
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check engine oil decay using the diagnosis equipment(2)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Thousands of kilometres
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels(1)
(1) Always only use the liquids shown in the handbook for topping up after having checked that the system is not damaged.
(2) If the engine oil quality detected by the vehicle diagnostics is lower than 20%, it is advisable to replace the engine oil and engine filter in order to avoid another service
operation after a short time.
171
SERVICING AND CARE
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
120
135
150
Thousands of miles
9
18
27
36
45
54
63
72
81
90
Years
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Thousands of kilometres
Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody
protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes),
rubber elements (gaiters, sleeves, bushes, etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
Check windscreen and rear window wiper blade
position/wear
●
●
●
●
●
Check operation of the windscreen wiper/washer system
and adjust jets, if necessary
●
●
●
●
●
Check cleanliness of bonnet and luggage compartment locks,
cleanliness and lubrication of linkage
●
●
●
●
●
Visually inspect conditions and wear of front disc brake pads
and operation of pad wear indicators
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Visually inspect conditions and wear of rear disc brake pads
and operation of pad wear indicators
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the
accessory drive belt(s)(3)
●
(3) The maximum mileage is 36,000 mi (60,000 km). The belt must be replaced every 4 years, regardless of distance travelled. If the vehicle is used in heavy conditions
(dusty areas, especially severe weather conditions, very low or very high temperatures for extended periods, urban driving, long periods of idling), the maximum
mileage is 18.000 mi (30.000 km). The belt must be replaced every 2 years regardless of the mileage
172
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
120
135
150
Thousands of miles
9
18
27
36
45
54
63
72
81
90
Years
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Thousands of kilometres
(4)
Change engine oil and replace oil filter
●
●
Replace Transfer Case oil (for AWD versions)
●
Spark plug replacement(5)
(3)
Replace accessory drive belt/s
●
Replace air cleaner cartridge(6)
●
(6)
Change the brake fluid
Replace the passenger compartment cleaner(6)
●
o
●
o
●
o
●
o
●
o
●
(3) The maximum mileage is 36,000 mi (60,000 km). The belt must be replaced every 4 years, regardless of distance travelled. If the vehicle is used in heavy conditions
(dusty areas, especially severe weather conditions, very low or very high temperatures for extended periods, urban driving, long periods of idling), the maximum
mileage is 18.000 mi (30.000 km). The belt must be replaced every 2 years regardless of the mileage
(4) The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signalled by the warning light or message in
the instrument panel. In any cases, never exceed 1 year.
(5) The replacement must be performed according to mileage and regards of the elapsed time. The following are vital in order to ensure correct operation and prevent
serious damage to the engine: - only use spark plugs specifically certified for the engine itself of the same type and brand (see the "Engine" paragraph in the "Technical
specifications" chapter); - strictly comply with the spark plug replacement intervals in the Scheduled Servicing Plan. It is advisable to contact a reference Dealership for
plug replacement.
(6) If the car is used in dusty areas, this cleaner should be replaced every 9,000 miles (15,000 km).
(o) Recommended operations
(●) Mandatory operations
173
SERVICING AND CARE
SCHEDULED SERVICING PLAN (2.2 JTD diesel engine versions)
IMPORTANT Once you have carried out the last intervention in the table, continue with the scheduled servicing, maintaining the
frequency indicated in the plan by marking each operation with a dot or dedicated note. Warning: simply restarting the maintenance
from the start of the plan may cause the allowed interval to be exceeded for some operations!
Thousands of kilometres
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
200
Thousands of miles
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108
120
Years
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Check battery charge status with the proper instrument
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check tyre condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary.
Check quick tyre repair kit recharge conditions/expiry date
(if provided)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction
indicators, hazard warning lights, boot, passenger
compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning
lights, etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels in engine
compartment (engine coolant, hydraulic clutch/brakes,
windscreen washer, battery, etc.)(1) (2)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check exhaust emissions
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Use the diagnosis socket to check the fuel/engine control
system operation, emissions and the engine oil
deterioration(3)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
(1) Always only use the liquids shown in the handbook for topping up after having checked that the system is not damaged.
(2) The consumption of AdBlue (UREA) additive depends on the conditions of the use of the car and is indicated by means of the symbol and a specific message on the
instrument panel display.
(3) If the engine oil quality detected by the vehicle diagnostics is lower than 20%, it is advisable to replace the engine oil and engine filter in order to avoid another service
operation after a short time.
174
Thousands of kilometres
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
200
Thousands of miles
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108
120
Years
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody
protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes),
rubber elements (gaiters, sleeves, bushes, etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
Check windscreen and rear window wiper blade
position/wear
●
●
●
●
●
Check operation of the windscreen wiper/washer system
and adjust jets, if necessary
●
●
●
●
●
Check cleanliness of bonnet and luggage compartment locks,
cleanliness and lubrication of linkage
●
●
●
●
●
Visually inspect conditions and wear of front disc brake pads
and operation of pad wear indicators
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Visually inspect conditions and wear of rear disc brake pads
and operation of pad wear indicators
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the
accessory drive belt(s)(4)
●
●
Visually inspect the toothed timing drive belt(4)
●
●
Change engine oil and replace oil filter
(5)
(4) The maximum mileage is 72,000 mi (120,000 km). The belt must be replaced every 5 years, regardless of distance travelled. If the vehicle is used in heavy conditions
(dusty areas, especially severe weather conditions, very low or very high temperatures for extended periods, urban driving, long periods of idling), the maximum
mileage is 36,000 mi (60,000 km). The belt must be replaced every 4 years regardless of the mileage
(5) The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signalled by the warning light or message in
the instrument panel. In any case, it must never exceed 2 years. Where the car is used mostly in urban settings you need to replace the engine oil filter every year.
175
SERVICING AND CARE
Thousands of kilometres
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
200
Thousands of miles
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108
120
Years
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
●
Replace Transfer Case oil (for AWD versions)
Replace accessory drive belt/s
(4)
Replace the toothed timing drive belt
(4)
●
●
Replace air cleaner cartridge(6)
Replace fuel filter cartridge(7)
●
●
(8)
Change the brake fluid
Replace the passenger compartment cleaner
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
(4) The maximum mileage is 72,000 mi (120,000 km). The belt must be replaced every 5 years, regardless of distance travelled. If the vehicle is used in heavy conditions
(dusty areas, especially severe weather conditions, very low or very high temperatures for extended periods, urban driving, long periods of idling), the maximum
mileage is 36,000 mi (60,000 km). The belt must be replaced every 4 years regardless of the mileage
(6) If the car is used in dusty areas, this cleaner should be replaced every 12,000 miles (20,000 km).
(7) If the car runs on fuel with quality below the relevant European specification, this filter must be replaced every 12,000 miles (20,000 km).
(8) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.
(o) Recommended operations
(●) Mandatory operations
176
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CHECKING LEVELS
165) 166)
63)
2.0 T4 MAir engine
172
09026V0002EM
1. Engine oil filler 2. Primary engine cooling reservoir plug 3. Brake fluid reservoir cap access cover 4. Windscreen/headlights
washer fluid reservoir cap 5. Secondary engine cooling reservoir plug
177
SERVICING AND CARE
2.0 T4 MAir engine (right-hand drive)
173
09026V0003EM
1. Engine oil filler 2. Primary engine cooling reservoir plug 3. Brake fluid reservoir cap access cover 4. Windscreen/headlights
washer fluid reservoir cap 5. Secondary engine cooling reservoir plug
178
2.2 JTD Engine
174
09026V0020EM
1. Engine oil filler 2. Primary engine cooling reservoir plug 3. Brake fluid reservoir cap access cover 4. Windscreen/headlights
washer fluid reservoir cap 5. Secondary engine cooling reservoir plug
179
SERVICING AND CARE
2.2 JTD engine (right-hand drive version)
175
09026V0021EM
1. Engine oil filler 2. Primary engine cooling reservoir plug 3. Brake fluid reservoir cap access cover 4. Windscreen/headlights
washer fluid reservoir cap 5. Secondary engine cooling reservoir plug
180
ENGINE OIL
167)
64)
IMPORTANT It is advisable to check the
oillevelindicationbeforelongjourneys.
Theengineoillevelcanbeseenonthe
instrumentpaneldisplayeverytimethe
engineisstarted,orontheConnect
systemdisplaybyactivatingonthemain
menu(MENUbutton)thefollowing
functionsinsequence:“Apps”;“Car
Status”and“OilLevel”.
Checkonthedisplayusingthe6notches
thattheoillevelisbetweenMINand
MAXlevel:1notchMINlevel,6notches
MAXlevel.Iftheoillevelindication
reachesthefirstredmark,addoil
throughthefiller1,consideringthateach
notchshownonthedisplaycorresponds
toapproximately:
2.0T4MAirengine
0.055UKgal(250ml).
2.2JTDEngine
ǕţǕǚǘ }ΦǗǕǕơţ
~}
} ƻ
ƻ }Ť
ǖ }} ~ţ
65)
IMPORTANT Make sure not to add too
much engine oil when topping up. Engine
oil in excess may damage the engine.
Have the car checked. Never exceed the
MAX level when topping up engine oil. It
is advisable to check the oil level in
intermediate steps on the display. Use
the oil dipstick on the Quadrifoglio
version.
IMPORTANT If the indication is not
correct after the procedure, contact an
Alfa Romeo Dealership.
IMPORTANT The oil level is not refreshed
immediately on the display after topping
up. Consequently, wait for the oil level to
be refreshed on the display following to
procedure shown below.
IMPORTANT The oil dipstick in the engine
compartment, on versions with 2.2 JTD
engine, must be used ONLY if the oil level
sensor is faulty. The latter condition is
indicated by the
symbol which will
appear on the instrument panel.
The manual engine oil level checking
procedure must be carried out, when
necessary, on a cold engine only.
Never attempt to carry out the manual
engine oil checking procedure (using the
dipstick) with the engine hot. Contact
with the surrounding hot engine parts
could cause burns.
This operation is permitted only for the
time actually needed to restore correct
operation of the oil level sensor at an Alfa
Romeo dealership.
Oil level indication update on display
If a top-up is needed, proceed as follows
to ensure correct indication of the oil
level on the display:
2.0 T4 MAir engine
Proceed as follows:
with the car level, run the engine for
approximately 5 minutes (temperature
higher than 176°F (80°C)) and then stop
the engine;
start the engine again and idle it for
about 2 minutes.
2.2 JTD Engine
Proceed as follows:
with the car level, run the engine until
the second oil temperature notch lights
up on the display on the instrument panel,
then stop the engine;
wait for at least 3 minutes, turn the
ignition switch in ON position without
starting the engine and wait for
20 seconds.
Engine oil consumption
66)
4)
The maximum engine oil consumption is
usually 0.88 lb (400 grams every
620 miles (1000 km). When the car is
new, the engine needs to be run in,
therefore the engine oil consumption can
only be considered stabilised after the
first 3100 - 3700 miles (5,000–6,000 km).
181
SERVICING AND CARE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
ACTIVATION SYSTEM OIL
ENGINE COOLANT FLUID
168)
5)
67)
The transmission control oil level should
only be checked at an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
If the level is below the MIN mark,
remove the reservoir cap and top up with
suitable fluid (see the "Fluids and
lubricants" paragraph in the "Technical
data" chapter), until it reaches the MAX
mark.
BATTERY
171) 172) 173) 173) 174)
6)
IMPORTANT Never attempt to remove
the cap with radiator or expansion tank
hot: RISK OF BURNS!
The battery does not require the
electrolyte to be topped up with distilled
water. A periodic check carried out at an
Alfa Romeo Dealership is, however,
necessary to check efficiency.
Follow the battery manufacturer's
instructions for maintenance.
WASHER FLUID FOR WINDSCREEN/
HEADLIGHTS
169) 170)
The windscreen and headlights washer
fluid reservoir (where provided) is
equipped with a telescopic filler. If the
level is too low, remove the reservoir cap
4 fig. 176, then lift the filler as shown in
the figure and add the fluid described in
the "Technical Specifications" chapter.
After having topped up the fluid, arrange
the filler correctly and then press on the
cap until you hear it click.
176
09086S0666EM
IMPORTANT With a low fluid level
(indicated by the dedicated symbol
appearing on the instrument panel
display), the headlight washer system
does not work, even though the screen
washers continue to work.
BRAKE FLUID
Check that the fluid is at the max. level. If
the liquid level in the tank is insufficient,
contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to
have the system checked.
182
Useful advice for extending the life of
your battery
To avoid draining your battery and make
it last longer, observe the following
instructions:
when you park the car, ensure that the
doors, tailgate and bonnet are closed
properly, to prevent any lights from
remaining on inside the passenger's
compartment;
switch off all roof lights inside the car:
the car is however equipped with a
system which switches all internal lights
off automatically;
do not keep accessories (e.g. Connect
system, hazard warning lights, etc.)
switched on for a long time when the
engine is not running;
before performing any operation on
the electrical system, disconnect the
cable from the negative battery terminal.
If, after purchasing the car, you wish to
install electrical accessories which
require permanent electrical supply (e.g.
alarm, etc.) or accessories which
influence the electrical supply
requirements, contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership, whose qualified staff will
evaluate the overall electrical
consumption.
IMPORTANT If the battery was
disconnected, do not start the engine
immediately after reconnecting the
terminals, but press the start button,
without operating the pedals, to turn on
the instrument panel and then start the
engine.
IMPORTANT If the charge level remains
under 50% for a long time, the battery is
damaged by sulphation, reducing its
capacity and efficiency at start-up. The
battery is also more prone to the risk of
freezing (already at 14 °F / -10°C).
Replacing the battery
If necessary, replace the battery with
another original battery with the same
specifications. Follow the battery
Manufacturer’s instructions for
maintenance.
WARNING
165) Never smoke while working in the
engine compartment: gas and inflammable
vapours may be present, with the risk of fire.
166) Be very careful when working in the
engine compartment when the engine is hot:
you may get burned. Do not get too close to
the radiator cooling fan: the electric fan may
start; danger of injury. Scarves, ties and
other loose clothing might be pulled by
moving parts.
167) If the engine oil is being topped up, wait
for the engine to cool down before loosening
the filler cap, particularly for vehicles with
aluminium cap (where provided). WARNING:
risk of burns!
168) The cooling system is pressurised. If
necessary, only replace the plug with
another original or the operation of the
system may be adversely affected. Do not
remove the reservoir plug when the engine is
hot: you risk scalding yourself.
169) Do not travel with the windscreen
washer fluid reservoir empty: the
windscreen washer is essential for
improving visibility. Repeated operation of
the system without fluid could damage or
cause rapid deterioration of some system
components.
170) Some commercial additives for
windscreen washer fluid are flammable. The
engine compartment contains hot
components which may start a fire.
171) Battery fluid is poisonous and
corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin and
eyes. Keep open flames away from the
battery and do not use objects that might
create sparks: risk of explosion and fire.
172) Using the battery with insufficient
fluid irreparably damages the battery and
may cause an explosion.
173) If the vehicle must remain unused for a
long time at a very low temperature, remove
the battery and take it to a warm place, to
avoid freezing.
174) When performing any operation on the
battery or near it, always protect your eyes
with special goggles.
IMPORTANT
63) Be careful not to confuse the various
types of fluids while topping up: they are not
compatible with each other! Topping up with
an unsuitable fluid could severely damage
your vehicle.
64) The oil level must never exceed the MAX
mark.
65) If the MAX mark is exceeded (last notch
on the right turns red) after the top-up, go to
an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as
possible to have the oil in excess removed.
66) Do not add oil with specifications other
than those of the oil already in the engine.
67) Use a fluid of the same type as that
already present in the reservoir for any
topping up of the engine cooling system. The
fluid cannot be mixed with other types of
antifreeze fluids. In the event of topping up
with an unsuitable product, under no
circumstances start the engine and contact
an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
183
SERVICING AND CARE
BATTERY RECHARGING
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT NOTES
175) 176)
4) Used engine oil and oil filters contain
substances which are harmful to the
environment. To change the oil and filters, we
advise you to contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
5) Used transmission fluid contains
substances that are harmful to the
environment. You are advised to contact an
Alfa Romeo Dealership for oil changes.
6) Batteries contain substances which are
very dangerous for the environment. For
battery replacement, contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
IMPORTANT Before using the charging
device, always make sure that it is
appropriate for the installed battery,
with constant voltage (below 14.8 V) and
low amperage (maximum 15 A).
IMPORTANT Recharge the battery in a
well ventilated environment.
177
04206V0004EM
remove the access cover fig. 178;
IMPORTANT Never charge or recharge a
frozen battery: it may explode because
of the nitrogen trapped inside the ice
crystals.
IMPORTANT At all times while charging
or recharging the battery, make sure that
any sparks or open flames are kept
sufficiently far away from the battery.
IMPORTANT Before using any devices to
charge or to maintain the charge of the
battery, carefully follow the instructions
provided with the device in order to
properly and safely connect it to the car
battery.
You can recharge the battery without
disconnecting the wires of the electrical
system of the car.
To reach the battery, remove the load
platform inside the luggage
compartment fig. 177;
184
178
09036V0005EM
remove the protective cover 1
fig. 179 and connect the positive cable
terminal of the charger (usually red) to
the positive terminal (+) of the battery;
connect the negative terminal of the
charger (usually black) to nut 2 next to
the negative terminal (-) of the battery, as
shown in fig. 179;
refit the protective cover of the
positive terminal of the battery and the
access cover to the battery
compartment.
179
09036V0002EM
The vehicle is equipped with an IBS
(Intelligent Battery Sensor), which is able
to measure the charge and discharge
voltage and calculate the charge level
and the general condition of the battery.
The sensor is placed next to the negative
terminal (-) of the battery.
For a correct charge/discharge
procedure, the charge voltage must go
through the IBS sensor.
Turn the charger on and follow the
instructions on the user's manual to
completely recharge the battery;
when the battery is charged, turn the
charger off before disconnecting it from
the battery;
first disconnect the black cable
terminal of the battery charger and then
the red cable terminal;
IMPORTANT If a "quick-type" battery
charger is used with the battery fitted on
the vehicle, before connecting it
disconnect both cables of the battery
itself. Do not use a "quick-type" battery
charger to provide the starting voltage.
WARNING
175) The process of charging or recharging
the battery produces hydrogen, a flammable
gas that can explode and cause serious
injury.
176) When charging or recharging the
battery, always follow the precautions
listed.
SERVICING PROCEDURES
177) 178) 179)
68) 69) 70) 71) 72) 73) 74)
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE
74) 75)
To ensure the best possible performance,
the air conditioning system must be
checked and undergo maintenance at an
Alfa Romeo Dealership at the beginning
of the summer.
WINDSCREEN WIPER
Raising the windscreen wiper blades
("Service position" function)
The "Service position" function allows the
driver to replace the windscreen wiper
blades more easily. It is also
recommended to activate this function
when it is snowing and to make it easier
to remove any dirt deposits in the area
where the blades are normally
positioned, when washing.
Activation of the function
To activate this function disable the
windscreen wiper (ring nut fig. 180 in
position O) before setting the ignition
device to STOP.
185
SERVICING AND CARE
This function can only be activated within
2 minutes of setting the ignition device
to STOP.
To activate this function, move the lever
upwards (unstable position) for at least
three seconds.
WARNING
181
180
fit the new blade, inserting the tab in
the dedicated housing in the arm and
checking that it is locked;
lower the wiper arm onto the
windscreen.
09046V0001EM
If, after using the function, the ignition
device is set back to ON with the blades
in a position other than rest position (at
the base of the windscreen), they will only
return to rest position following a
command given using the stalk (stalk
upwards, into unstable position) or when
a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) is exceeded.
Replacing the windscreen/rearscreen
wiper blades
Proceed as follows:
lift the wiper arm, press the
attachment spring tab fig. 181 and
remove the blade from the arm;
186
09046V0002EM
IMPORTANT Do not operate the
windscreen wiper with the blades lifted
from the windscreen.
Windscreen/rear window washer
The screen washer jets are located on the
windscreen wiper arms, the rear screen
wiper arm and the rear spoiler. If there is
no jet of fluid, firstly check that there is
fluid in the reservoir (see paragraph
“Engine compartment” in this chapter).
Then check that the nozzle holes are not
clogged; use a needle to unblock them if
necessary.
177) The air intake system (air cleaner,
rubber hoses, etc.) can be a protection in the
case of blowbacks from the engine. DO NOT
REMOVE this system unless you need to
carry out repair or servicing operations.
Before starting the engine, ensure that the
system has not been removed: failure to
observe this precaution may result in serious
injury.
178) Exhaust emissions are very dangerous,
and may be lethal. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colourless, odourless gas which
can cause fainting and poisoning if inhaled.
179) The exhaust system may reach high
temperatures and may cause a fire if the
vehicle is parked on flammable material. Dry
grass or leaves can also catch fire if they
come into contact with the exhaust system.
Do not park or use the vehicle in a place in
which the exhaust system might come into
contact with flammable material.
IMPORTANT
68) Incorrect servicing of the vehicle or
failure to carry out operations or repairs
(when necessary) may lead to more
expensive repairs, damage to other
components or have a negative impact on
the vehicle performance. Have any
malfunction inspected immediately by an
Alfa Romeo Dealership.
69) The vehicle is equipped with fluids which
are optimised or protecting its performance
and life and extending service intervals. Do
not use chemicals for washing these
components since they may damage the
engine, the transmission or the climate
control system. This damage is not covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. If any component
needs to be washed due to malfunctioning,
use only the specific liquid for that
procedure.
70) An excessive or insufficient amount of
oil inside the base is extremely damaging to
the engine. Make sure it is always at an
adequate level.
71) Vehicles equipped with catalytic
converter must be fuelled only with unleaded
petrol. Leaded petrol would permanently
damage the catalytic converter and
eliminate its ability to reduce polluting
emissions, seriously compromising the
engine performance, which would be
irreparably damaged. If the engine does not
work correctly, especially if it starts
irregularly or if there is a reduction of its
performance, immediately go to an Alfa
Romeo Dealership. Prolonged and faulty
operation of the engine may cause
overheating of the converter and, as a
consequence, possible damage to the
converter and the vehicle.
72) Using a gearbox fluid different from that
approved may compromise gearshifting
quality and/or cause vibration of the
gearbox itself.
73) It is recommended to have the vehicle
serviced by an Alfa Romeo Dealership. When
carrying out normal periodic operations and
small servicing interventions personally on
the vehicle, it is recommended to use
suitable equipment, genuine spare parts and
the necessary fluids. Do not carry out any
interventions if you don't have the necessary
experience.
74) Always require the use of only
compressor coolants and lubricants
approved and suitable for the specific air
conditioning system fitted on the vehicle.
Some non-approved coolants are flammable
and may explode, with the risk of injuries. The
use of non-approved coolants or lubricants
may adversely affect system efficiency,
leading to expensive repairs.
75) The air conditioner system contains
coolant under high pressure: to avoid injuries
to people or damage to the system, any
coolant addition or repair that requires to
disconnect the cables must be carried out by
an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
LIFTING THE VEHICLE
If the car needs to be jacked up, go to an
Alfa Romeo Dealership which is equipped
with shop jacks and jack arms.
The vehicle lifting points are marked on
symbols (see
the side skirts with the
fig. 182 ).
182
09056V0001EM
187
SERVICING AND CARE
WHEELS AND TYRES
180) 181) 182)
Before embarking on a long trip, and
every two weeks, check the tyre inflation
pressure. Check the tyres when cold.
SNOW CHAINS
76)
Rear Wheel Drive and All-wheel drive
versions
It is possible to fit 0.5 in (13 mm) chains
on all the tyres except for R20.
Important notes
The use of snow chains should be in
compliance with local regulations of each
country. In certain countries, tyres
marked with code M+S (Mud and Snow)
are considered as winter equipment;
therefore their use is equivalent to that
of the snow chains.
IMPORTANT The snow chains may be
applied only to the rear wheel tyres.
Installing them on the rear wheel tyres
could damage the suspension and
transmission.
Check the tension of the snow chains
after the first few metres have been
driven.
188
IMPORTANT Using snow chains with
tyres with non-original dimensions may
damage the vehicle.
IMPORTANT Using different size or type
(M+S, snow, etc.) tyres between front and
rear axle may adversely affect car
driveability, with the risk of losing control
of the car and resulting accidents.
SUGGESTIONS ABOUT THE ROTATION
OF THE TYRES
The front and rear tyres are subject to
different loads and stress due to
steering, manoeuvres and braking. For
this reason they are subject to uneven
wear.
To resolve this problem, tyres should be
rotated at the appropriate time (6200 /
9300 miles (10000 / 15000 km)).
Inverting the tyres means moving them
to different positions on the same side of
the car (front to back and vice versa).
IMPORTANT Crossing the tyres is not
advised, so placing a tyre on a different
axle on the other side of the car is
impossible.
Tyre rotation contributes to the
preservation of the grip and traction
performance on wet, muddy or snowy
roads, guaranteeing optimal driveability
of the car.
In the case of irregular wear of the tyres
identify the cause and correct it as soon
as possible, by contacting an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
WARNING
180) The road holding qualities of the car
also depend on the correct inflation pressure
of the tyres.
181) If tyre pressure is too low, it may
overheat and be severely damaged as a
result.
182) Never submit alloy rims to repainting
treatments requiring the use of
temperatures exceeding 150°C. The
mechanical properties of the wheels could
be impaired.
IMPORTANT
76) Keep your speed down when snow chains
are fitted; do not exceed 50 km/h (or the
equivalent in miles). Avoid potholes, do not
drive over steps or pavements and do not
drive long distances over roads without
snow, to avoid damaging both your vehicle
and the road surface.
BODYWORK
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Paintwork
77)
7)
Touch up abrasions and scratches
immediately to prevent the formation of
rust.
Some parts of the car may be covered
with a matt paint which, in order to be
maintained intact, requires special care:
see the instructions in the warning at the
end of this paragraph.
If you want to wash a car with automatic
transmission in a car wash that moves it,
you must do the following:
make sure that the car is on a flat
surface and that automatic engagement
of the parking brake when the engine is
switched off is disabled (for how to
disable it, refer to the “Electric parking
brake” section in the “Starting and
driving” chapter);
with the car stationary, the gear in N
(Neutral) and the brake pedal up: press
the start button. The car will remain in N
(Neutral) for 15 minutes, after which P
(Park) mode will be activated.
78)
To correctly wash the vehicle, follow
these instructions:
if high pressure jets or cleaners are
used to wash the vehicle, hold at least
16 in [40 cm] away from the bodywork to
avoid damage or alteration. Build up of
water could cause damage to the car in
the long term;
to make it easier to remove any dirt
deposits in the area where the blades are
normally located it is recommended to
position the windscreen wipers vertically
(service position), for more information
consult the “Maintenance procedures”
paragraph in this chapter.
78) Avoid washing with rollers and/or
brushes in washing stations. Wash the car
only by hand using neutral pH detergents; dry
it with a wet chamois leather. Abrasive
products and/or polishes should not be used
for cleaning the car. Bird droppings must be
washed off immediately and thoroughly as
the acid they contain is particularly
aggressive. Avoid (if at all possible) parking
the vehicle under trees; remove vegetable
resins immediately as, when dried, it may
only be possible to remove them with
abrasive products and/or polishes, which is
highly inadvisable as they could alter the
typical opaqueness of the paint. Do not use
pure windscreen washer fluid for cleaning
the front windscreen and rear window; dilute
it min. 50% with water. Only use pure screen
washer fluid when strictly necessary due to
outside temperature conditions.
IMPORTANT
77) In order to preserve the aesthetic
appearance of the paint abrasive products
and/or polishes should not be used for
cleaning the vehicle.
IMPORTANT
7) Detergents pollute the environment. Only
wash your vehicle in areas equipped to
collect and treat wastewater from this type
of activity.
189
This page is intentionally left blank
TECHNICAL DATA
IDENTIFICATION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIMS AND TYRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WEIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REFUELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUEL CONSUMPTION AND CO2 EMISSIONS . .
PRESCRIPTIONS FOR HANDLING THE VEHICLE
AT THE END OF ITS LIFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Everything you may find useful for understanding how your vehicle
is made and works is contained in this chapter and illustrated with
data, tables and graphics.
For the enthusiasts and the technician, but also just for those who
want to know every detail of their vehicle.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.192
.193
.195
.199
.200
.202
.205
.208
.209
. . . . . . . . . .210
TECHNICAL DATA
IDENTIFICATION DATA
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
is stamped on a plate on the front left
corner of the dashboard trim fig. 183,
which can be seen from outside the
vehicle, through the windscreen.
This number is also stamped on the
chassis at the front left shock absorber
and can be seen by opening the bonnet
fig. 184.
184
183
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
The plate is located on the left side front
door pillar fig. 185 and shows the data
about:
1: correct value of smoke coefficient
(for Diesel engines);
2: name of the manufacturer,
type-approval number of the car,
identification number of the car, max.
permitted weights;
3: engine identification, type variant
version, spare part number, colour code,
additional information.
10016V0002EM
10016V0001EM
185
192
10016V0003EM
ENGINE
2.0 T4 MAir
Cycle
200 HP
280 HP
Otto
Otto
Number and position of cylinders
4 in line
4 in line
Piston bore and stroke (mm)
84 / 90
84 / 90
1995
1995
10 ± 0.35
10 ± 0.35
Maximum power (ECE) (kW)
148
206
Maximum power (ECE) (HP)
200
280
Corresponding engine speed (rpm)
4500
5250
Maximum torque (ECE) (Nm)
330
400
Maximum torque (ECE) (kgm)
33.6
40.8
Corresponding engine speed (rpm)
1750
Total displacement (cm³)
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Fuel
2250
NGK ILZKR7G
Unleaded petrol with R.O.N. no lower than 91
(EN228 specifications)
193
TECHNICAL DATA
2.2 JTD
150 HP(*)
160 HP
180 HP(*)
190 HP
210 HP
Cycle
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
Number and position of cylinders
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
Piston bore and stroke (mm)
83 / 99
83 / 99
83 / 99
83 / 99
83 / 99
2143
2143
2143
2143
2143
15.5 ± 0.4
15.5 ± 0.4
15.5 ± 0.4
15.5 ± 0.4
15.5 ± 0.4
Maximum power (ECE) (kW)
110
118
132
140
154
Maximum power (ECE) (HP)
150
160
180
190
210
Corresponding engine speed (rpm)
4000
3750
3750
3500
3500
Maximum torque (ECE) (Nm)
450
450
450
450
470
Maximum torque (ECE) (kgm)
45.9
45.9
45.9
45.9
47.9
Corresponding engine speed (rpm)
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
Total displacement (cm³)
Compression ratio
Fuel
(*) For versions/markets where specified
194
Automotive diesel fuel (EN590 and EN16734 specifications)
RIMS AND TYRES
Alloy rims. Tubeless radial carcass tyres.
All approved tyres are listed in the
registration document.
IMPORTANT If there are any
discrepancies between the Owner
Handbook and the Registration
Document, take the information from the
latter. For safe driving, the car must be
fitted with tyres of the same make and
type on all wheels.
IMPORTANT Using tyres of a different
size, type, brand or design at the front
and rear may adversely affect car
driveability. We recommend using tyres
approved by the manufacturer. The
manufacturer cannot determine if
unapproved tyres are suitable for use
and therefore cannot guarantee vehicle
safety in those conditions.
IMPORTANT Do not use air chambers
with tubeless tyres.
195
TECHNICAL DATA
RIMS AND TYRES PROVIDED
183)
Version
2.0 T4 MAir
2.2 JTD
Space saver spare wheel
(where provided)
Wheels
Tyres
17 x 7.5J
225/65 R17 102V
17 x 8J
235/65 R17 104V
18 x 8J
235/60 R18 103W
19 x 8J
235/55 R19 101Y
20 x 8.5J
255/45 R20 105V
195/75 18 106P
NOTE In partnership with Pirelli, Alfa Romeo has developed a range of tyres specially for the Alfa Romeo Stelvio. They can be
identified by the “AR” mark. The “AR” tyres ensure the best vehicle performance and safety. Alfa Romeo cannot guarantee that
non-approved tyres are suitable, and they may cause vehicle malfunctions.
2.0 T4 MAir and 2.2 JTD engines: winter tyres are available in the following sizes: 235/65R17 108H, 235/60R18 103V,
235/55R19 101V and 255/45 R20 101W.
Always check the registration certificate for the tyres that can be installed (size, load index, speed symbol).Always check the
registration certificate for the tyres that can be installed (size, load index, speed symbol).
196
COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE
When the tyres are warm, the inflation pressure should be +4.35 psi (+0.3 bar) in relation to the recommended figure. However,
recheck that the value is correct with the tyre cold. If it is necessary to raise the vehicle, refer to the "Raising the vehicle" paragraph in
the "In an emergency" chapter.
The pressures given below apply to all tyre types: summer, winter and all season (where provided).
2.0 T4 MAir and 2.2 JTD engines
Unladen/medium load [psi / bar]
Full load [psi / bar]
Tyres
Front
225/65 R17
Rear
30.5 / 2.1 (*)
33.3 / 2.3 (*)
32 / 2.2 (**)
34.8 / 2.4 (**)
Front
Rear
34.8 / 2.4
37.7 / 2.6
235/65 R17
32 / 2.2
34.8 / 2.4
33.3 / 2.3
37.7 / 2.6
235/60 R18
30.5 / 2.1
33.3 / 2.3
33.3 / 2.3
37.7 / 2.6
235/55 R19
30.5 / 2.1
33.3 / 2.3
33.3 / 2.3
37.7 / 2.6
255/45 R20
33.3 / 2.3
36.3 / 2.5
34.8 / 2.4
39.2 / 2.7
195/75 18
(Space-saver wheel)
43.5 / 3.0
For 225/65 R17 tyres, in medium load conditions, there are two possible pressure settings depending on the mode required:
comfort (*) and ECO (**). Restore the inflation pressures accordingly. ECO configuration consumption is not guaranteed with comfort
configuration pressures.
If winter tyres are fitted, always use the same inflation pressures as for the tyres originally installed (table above). For
225/65 R17 tyres in medium load conditions, use the comfort configuration pressures.
197
TECHNICAL DATA
SNOW CHAINS
79)
Rear Wheel Drive and All-wheel drive versions
It is possible to fit 0.5 in (13 mm) chains on all the tyres except for R20.
Important notes
The use of snow chains should be in compliance with local regulations of each country. In certain countries, tyres marked with code
M+S (Mud and Snow) are considered as winter equipment; therefore their use is equivalent to that of the snow chains.
IMPORTANT The snow chains may be applied only to the rear wheel tyres. Installing them on the rear wheel tyres could damage the
suspension and transmission.
Check the tension of the snow chains after the first few metres have been driven.
IMPORTANT Using snow chains with tyres with non-original dimensions may damage the vehicle.
IMPORTANT Using different size or type (M+S, snow, etc.) tyres between front and rear axle may adversely affect car driveability,
with the risk of losing control of the car and resulting accidents.
WARNING
183) If winter tyres with a lower speed rating than that indicated in the Registration Document are used, do not exceed the maximum speed
corresponding to the speed rating of the tyres used.
IMPORTANT
79) Keep your speed down when snow chains are fitted; do not exceed 50 km/h. Avoid potholes, do not drive over steps or sidewalks and do not
drive long distances over roads without snow, to avoid damaging both your vehicle and the road surface.
198
DIMENSIONS
Dimensions are expressed in inches/mm and refer to the car equipped with its original tyres. Height is measured with an unladen
vehicle, with the driver.
186
A
33.9 / 861
10106V0001EM
B
110.94 /
2818
C
39.68 / 1008
D
184.5 /
4687
E
65.78 / 1671 (*)
65.6 / 1666 (**)
F
63.5 / 1613
G
65.08 /
1653
H
85.16 /
2163
I
74.9 /
1903
(*) AWD versions
(**) RWD versions
Small variations with respect to the reported values are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims.
199
TECHNICAL DATA
WEIGHTS
Weights (lb / kg)
2.0 T4 MAir
200 HP
280 HP
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment)
3660 / 1660
3660 / 1660
Payload including the driver(*)
1411 / 640
1411 / 640
– front axle
2359 / 1070
2359 / 1070
– rear axle
2910 / 1320
2910 / 1320
– total
5070 / 2300
5070 / 2300
Maximum combined load (permitted maximum load + towable weight trailer with brakes)(***)
8580 / 3900
10120 / 4600
– braked trailer
3520 / 1600
5070 / 2300
– trailer without brakes
1653 / 750
1653 / 750
Maximum load on roof
165 / 75
165 / 75
Maximum load on tow hitch (trailer with brakes)
141 / 64
209 / 95
Maximum permitted loads(**)
Towable loads
(*) If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum
permitted loads.
(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.
(***) Never exceed the maximum combined vehicle load value: the maximum towable load is only allowed if it does not exceed the maximum combined vehicle load.
200
Weights (lb / kg)
2.2 JTD
160 HP/ 190 HP
RWD
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment)
190 HP / 210 HP
AWD
3652 / 1604
3839 / 1745
1474 / 670
1463 / 665
– front axle
2288 / 1040
2398 / 1090
– rear axle
2888 / 1310
2948 / 1340
– total
5126 / 2330
5302 / 2410
Maximum combined load (permitted maximum load + towable weight trailer with brakes)(***)
8646 / 3930
10362 / 4710
Payload including the driver(*)
Maximum permitted loads(**)
Towable loads
– braked trailer
3527 / 1600
5137 / 2330
– trailer without brakes
1653 / 750
1653 / 750
Maximum load on roof
165 / 75
165 / 75
Maximum load on tow hitch (trailer with brakes)
141 / 64
209 / 95
(*) If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum
permitted loads.
(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.
(***) Never exceed the maximum combined vehicle load value: the maximum towable load is only allowed if it does not exceed the maximum combined vehicle load.
201
TECHNICAL DATA
REFUELLING
80) 81)
2.0 T4 MAir
2.2 JTD
14 / 64
12.7 (58) / 14 (64)(*)
including a reserve of (UK gal /
litres) (2.0 T4 MAir engine)
2.11 / 9.6
–
including a reserve of (UK
gal/litres) (2.2 JTD engine with
12.7 UK gal/58 litre fuel tank)
–
1.98 / 9.0
including a reserve of (UK
gal/litres) (2.2 JTD engine with
14 UK gal/64 litre fuel tank)
–
2.2 / 10
AdBlue® tank (where provided)
(UK gal / litres)
–
3.5 / 16.1
Fuel tank (UK gal / litres)
Main tank cooling system (UK gal/
litres)
1.93 (8.8) / 2.03 (9.25)(**)
1.71 (7.8) / 1.75 (8.0)(***)
Secondary tank cooling system
(UK gal / litres)
0.95 (4.3) / 1.15 (5.25)(**)
1.03 (4.7)(****)
Prescribed fuels and original
lubricants
Unleaded petrol with RON no
lower than 95
(EN228 specifications)
(2.0 T4 MAir engine) / Automotive
diesel fuel (EN590 and
EN16734 specifications)
(2.2 JTD engine)
AdBlue® (DIN 70 070 and ISO
22241-1 specifications)
(2.2 JTD engine)
50% mixture of distilled water
and PARAFLU UP (*****)
(*) For markets, where provided
(**) 280 HP versions
(***) 190 HP / 210 HP versions
(*****) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a 60% mixture of PARAFLU UP and 40% demineralised water.
(****) Only 2.2 JTD 190 HP / 210 HP AWD versions with automatic transmission
202
2.0 T4 MAir
2.2 JTD
Prescribed fuels and original
lubricants
SELENIA DIGITEK P.E.
(2.0 T4 MAir engine) / SELENIA
W.R. FORWARD 0W-20 (2.2 JTD
engine) (versions with AdBlue®) /
SELENIA W.R. FORWARD 0W-20
(2.2 JTD 150 HP / 180 HP
engines) (versions without
AdBlue®) / SELENIA W.R.
FORWARD 0W-30 (2.2 JTD
210 HP engines) (versions without
AdBlue®)
Engine oil filter (UK gal / litres)
0.13 / 0.6
0.11 / 0.5
Engine oil sump (UK gal / litres)
1.01 / 4.6
0.85 / 3.9
Hydraulic brake circuit
(UK gal / litres)
0.2 / 0.9
0.02 / 0.9
TUTELA BRAKE FLUID
EXTREME HT
Windscreen washer tank
(UK gal / litres)
0.9 / 4.1
0.92 /4.2
PETRONAS DURANCE SC 35
Automatic transmission
(UK gal / litres)
–
2.0 / 9.1
Automatic transmission AWD
(UK gal / litres)
2.05 / 9.3
–
Automatic transmission RWD
(UK gal / litres)
2.07 / 9.4
–
RDU 230-LSD differential
(UK gal / litres)
0.2 / 0.9
0.2 / 0.9
RDU 210/215-LSD differential
(UK gal / litres)
0.24 / 1.1
0.24 / 1.1
TUTELA TRANSMISSION AS8
TUTELA TRANSMISSION LS
AXLE FLUID
203
TECHNICAL DATA
Prescribed fuels and original
lubricants
2.0 T4 MAir
2.2 JTD
AWD System FAD transfer case
(UK gal / litres)
0.11 / 0.5
0.11 / 0.5
TUTELA TRANSMISSION
HYPOIDE GEAR OIL
AWD System TRANSFER CASE
(UK gal / litres)
0.15 / 0.7
0.15 / 0.7
TUTELA TRANSMISSION
TRANSFER CASE
IMPORTANT
80) Only use AdBlue ® (UREA) compliant with DIN 70 070 and ISO 22241-1. Other fluids may cause damage to the system: also exhaust emissions
would no longer comply with the law.
81) The distribution companies are responsible for the compliance of their product. Observe the precautions of storage and maintenance, in order
to preserve the initial qualities. The manufacturer will not recognise any guarantee in case of malfunctions and damage caused to the car due to
the use of AdBlue ® not in accordance with regulations.
204
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the
Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications.
Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration.
82)
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE LUBRICATION
Use
Features
Specification
Original fluids and
lubricants
Replacement interval
2.0 T4 MAir
SAE 0W-30
ACEA C2
9.55535–GS1
SELENIA DIGITEK P.E.
Contractual Technical
Reference No.F020.B12
According to Scheduled
Servicing Plan
2.2 JTD
SAE 0W-20
ACEA C2
9.55535–DSX
SELENIA W.R. FORWARD
0W-20
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F013.K15
According to Scheduled
Servicing Plan
2.2 JTD 210 HP(*)
SAE 0W-30
ACEA C2
9.55535–DS1
SELENIA W.R. FORWARD
0W-30
Contractual Technical
Reference N°842.F13
According to Scheduled
Servicing Plan
(*) Versions without AdBlue - UREA.
If lubricants conforming to the specific request are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used to top
up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.
205
TECHNICAL DATA
Use
Lubricants and greases
for drive transmission
Features
Brake fluid
206
Original fluids and
lubricants
Applications
ATF Synthetic lubricant
9.55550-AV5
TUTELA TRANSMISSION
AS 8
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F139.I11
Automatic transmission
SAE 75W-85 synthetic
lubricant
9.55550-DA9
TUTELA TRANSMISSION
LS AXLE FLUID
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F059.N15
Differential RDU 230-LSD
and RDU 210/215 -LSD
SAE 75W-85 API
GL-5 synthetic lubricant
9.55550-DA8
TUTELA TRANSMISSION
AXLE-DRIVE
Contractual Technical
Reference N°F058.N15
Differentials and reduction
gears RDU 230-TV
(2.9 V6 engine)
SAE 75W-80 APL
GL-5 synthetic lubricant
9.55550-DA10
TUTELA TRANSMISSION
HYPOIDE GEAR OIL
Contractual Technical
Reference n° F060.N15
AWD System FAD transfer
case
9.55550-DA11
TUTELA TRANSMISSION
TRANSFER CASE
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F061.N15
AWD System TRANSFER
CASE
NLGI 0-1 grease for
constant velocity joints
with low friction
coefficient
9.55580-GRAS II
TUTELA STAR 700
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F701.C07
Differential side constant
velocity joints
NLGI 1-2 molybdenum
disulphide grease for high
temperatures
9.55580-GRAS II
TUTELA ALL STAR
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F702.G07
Wheel side constant
velocity joints
9.55597
TUTELA BRAKE FLUID
EXTREME HT
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F001.N15
Hydraulic brakes and clutch
controls
SAE 75W synthetic
lubricant
Lubricants and greases
for drive transmission
Specification
DOT 4
Use
Features
Specification
Original fluids and
lubricants
Applications
Protective agent for
radiators
Protective with antifreeze,
ethylene glycol based
organic formula, free from
amine and 2–EH (2–ethyl
hexanoic acid), containing
corrosion inhibitors and
anti-foam additives. CUNA
NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306
9.55523 or MS.90032
PARAFLU UP
Contractual Technical
Reference N°F101.M01
Use rate 50% Not mixable
with different formulation
products(*)
Windscreen washer
fluid
CUNA NC 956-11
9.55522
PETRONAS DURANCE SC
35
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F001.D16
To be used diluted or
undiluted in windscreen
washer/wiper systems
AdBlue® additive for
diesel emissions
Water-AdBlue® solution
DIN 70 070 and ISO
22241-1
AdBlue®
To be used for filling the
AdBlue® tank on vehicles
equipped with Selective
Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
system (2.2 JTD engine)
Diesel fuel additive
Antifreeze additive for
diesel fuel for diesel engine
protection
PETRONAS DURANCE
DIESEL ART
Contractual Technical
Reference N°F601.C06
To be mixed with diesel fuel
(25 cc per 10 litres)
Automatic climate
control system (HVAC)
R1234yf or R134a
(depending on market)
(*) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a 60% mixture of PARAFLU UP and 40% demineralised water.
IMPORTANT
82) The use of products with different specifications than those indicated above could cause damage to the engine that is not covered by the
warranty.
207
TECHNICAL DATA
PERFORMANCE
Top performance after the initial period of car usage.
Versions
Maximum speed (mph / km/h)
Acceleration from 0-60 mph /
(0-100 km/h) (sec.)
2.0 T4 MAir 200 HP AWD
134 / 215
7.2
2.0 T4 MAir 280 HP AWD
143 / 230
5.7
2.2 JTD 150 HP RWD (*)
123 / 198
8.8
2.2 JTD 160 HP RWD
123 / 198
8.8
2.2 JTD 180 HP RWD (*)
130 / 210
7.6
2.2 JTD 190 HP RWD
130 / 210
7.6
2.2 JTD 180 HP AWD (*)
130 / 210
7.6
2.2 JTD 190 HP AWD
130 / 210
7.6
2.2 JTD 210 HP AWD
134 / 215
6.6
(*) For versions/markets where specified
208
FUEL CONSUMPTION AND CO2 EMISSIONS
The fuel consumption and CO2 emission figures declared by the manufacturer are determined on the basis of the type-approval
tests laid down by the applicable standards in the country where the vehicle is registered.
The type of route, traffic conditions, weather conditions, driving style, general condition of the car, trim level/equipment/
accessories, use of the climate control system, car load, presence of roof racks and other situations that adversely affect the
aerodynamics or wind resistance lead to different fuel consumption values than those measured. The fuel consumption will only
become more regular after driving the first 3000 km.
To find the specific fuel consumption and CO2 emission figures for this car, please refer to the data in the Certificate of Conformity,
and the related documentation that accompanies the vehicle.
209
TECHNICAL DATA
PRESCRIPTIONS FOR HANDLING THE VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITS LIFE
(where provided)
For years, Alfa Romeo S.p.A. has pursued a global commitment to protect and respect the environment by continually improving its
production processes and developing increasingly "eco-compatible" products. To grant customers the best possible service in terms
of respecting environmental laws and in response to European Directive 2000/53/EC governing vehicles at the end of their life, Alfa
Romeo S.p.A. is offering its customers the chance to hand over their car at the end of its life without incurring any additional costs.
The European Directive sets out that when the vehicle is handed over the last keeper or owner should not incur any expenses as a
result of it having a zero or negative market value.
To hand your car over at the end of its life without extra cost, contact one of our dealerships if you are purchasing another car or an
Alfa Romeo S.p.A.-authorised collection and scrapping centre. These centres have been carefully chosen to offer high quality service
for the collection, treatment and recycling of vehicles at their end of life, respecting the surrounding environment.
You can find further information on these collection and scrapping centres either from an Alfa Romeo S.p.A. dealership or by calling
the number in the Warranty Booklet or by consulting the Alfa Romeo S.p.A. website.
210
MULTIMEDIA
ROAD SAFETY . . . . . . . . . .
RECEPTION CONDITIONS . . .
CARE AND MAINTENANCE . .
ANTITHEFT PROTECTION . . .
IMPORTANT NOTES . . . . . . .
CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . .
RADIO MODE . . . . . . . . . . .
MEDIA MODE . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth® SOURCE . . . . . . .
USB/iPod/AUX SUPPORT . . .
PHONE MODE . . . . . . . . . .
NAVIGATION MODE . . . . . . .
CAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VOICE COMMANDS . . . . . . .
OFFICIAL TYPE APPROVALS .
ALFA CONNECT . . . . . . . . .
This chapter describes the main functions of the Connect system
(6.5” and 8.8” displays) that can be fitted on the vehicle.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.212
.212
.212
.213
.213
.214
.217
.219
.219
.220
.220
.220
.221
.222
.222
.224
.227
.228
.228
MULTIMEDIA
ROAD SAFETY
184) 185)
Learn how to use the various system
functions before setting off.
Read the instructions for the system
carefully before setting off.
RECEPTION CONDITIONS
(where provided)
Reception conditions change constantly
while driving. Reception may be
interfered with by the presence of
mountains, buildings or bridges,
especially when you are far away from
the broadcaster.
IMPORTANT The volume may be
adjusted when receiving traffic
information and news.
212
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
83) 84)
Observe the following precautions to
ensure the system is fully operational:
avoid hitting the display lens with
pointed or hard objects that could
damage its surface;
clean with a damp cloth (microfibre if
possible). If necessary, you can use a
delicate mild soap and water solution,
then dry with a soft, dry cloth. Do not
apply pressure to the display lens while
cleaning;
do not use alcohol, benzines and their
derivatives, ammonia, solvents or other
surfactants to clean the display lens;
prevent any liquid from entering the
system: this could damage it beyond
repair.
ANTITHEFT PROTECTION
IMPORTANT NOTES
The system is equipped with an anti-theft
protection system based on the
exchange of information with the
electronic control unit (Body Computer)
on the vehicle.
This guarantees maximum security and
prevents the system from being used on
other cars in the event of theft. If
necessary contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
Look at the screen only and when it is
necessary and safe. If you need to look at
the screen for a long time, pull over to a
safe place so as not to be distracted
while driving.
Immediately stop using the system in the
event of a fault. Otherwise the system
might be damaged. Contact an Alfa
Romeo Dealership as soon as possible to
have the system repaired.
WARNING
184) Follow the safety rules here below:
otherwise serious injuries may occur to the
occupants or the system may be damaged.
185) If the volume is too loud this can be
dangerous. Adjust the volume so that you
can still hear background noises (e.g. horns,
ambulances, police vehicles, etc.).
IMPORTANT
83) Only clean the front panel and the
display with a soft, clean, dry, anti-static
cloth. Cleaning and polishing products may
damage the surface. Do not use alcohol or
similar products to clean the panel or the
display.
84) Do not use the display as a base for
supports with suction pads or adhesives for
external navigators or smartphones or
similar devices.
213
MULTIMEDIA
CONTROLS
CONTROLS ON TUNNEL
187
11036V0014EM
Tunnel control summary table
ON/OFF control and Volume (1)
Action
Function
LONG PRESS
switches the Connect system on and off.
ROTATION
clockwise to increase the volume, counter-clockwise to decrease the
volume.
SHORT PRESS
Switches the system on if it is off.
In Radio mode: activates/deactivates the Mute function.
In Media mode: activates play/pause.
MOVE TO THE SIDE
In Radio mode: to the right, selects the next radio station, to the left,
selects the previous radio station.
In Media mode: to the right, selects the next track, to the left, selects the
previous track.
214
OPTION button (2)
Pressing the "Option" button from within the (”RADIO”, “MEDIA”, “PHONE”, “NAVIGATOR”) modes will open the "Settings" screen of
the corresponding mode. Press it again to go back to the previously selected mode.
Rotary Pad (3)
Action
Function
ROTATION
Within the Menus: scrolls the menu items.
In Navigation mode (where provided): zoom function on the maps.
PUMP
Within the Menus: confirms the selection.
BRIEF MOVEMENT TO THE RIGHT
Within the Menus: accesses to the sub-menu of the selected function.
In Navigation mode (where provided), in the Explore map: to move to the
right on the map.
BRIEF MOVEMENT TO THE LEFT
Within the Menus: returns to the previous menu; Esc function.
In Navigation mode (where provided), in the Explore map: to move to the
left on the map.
BRIEF UPWARD MOVEMENT
Within the Menus: enter the Multitasking menu and closes the
preselection bar.
In Navigation mode (where provided), in the Explore map: to move
upwards on the map.
BRIEF DOWNWARD MOVEMENT
Activates the radio preselection.
Within the Menus: enter the preselection bar and closes the Multitasking
menu.
In Navigation mode (where provided), in the Explore map: to move
downwards on the map.
215
MULTIMEDIA
TOUCHPAD controls
(where provided)
The top surface of the Rotary Pad is a touchpad device and can be used to operate some controls
Function
Action
Where:
writing
Enter letters, symbols and
numbers
Data input screens
scroll left
Data input screens
Delete letters
movement to open and close
Map screen
Zoom
scroll
Drag
MENU button (4)
Opens the main menu.
216
Map screen
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
DESCRIPTION
The controls for the main system functions are present on the steering wheel to make control easier.
The activation of the function selected is controlled, in some cases, by how long the button is pressed (short or long pressure) as
described in the table below.
193
11046V0001EM
CONTROLS ON STEERING WHEEL SUMMARY TABLE
Button
(1)
Action
Function
SHORT PRESS
In Radio mode: selects the next radio station.
In Media mode: selects the next track.
LONG PRESS
In Radio mode: scan higher frequencies until released.
In Media mode: fast forward track.
217
MULTIMEDIA
Button
(2)
Action
Function
SHORT PRESS
In Radio mode: selects the previous radio station.
In Media mode: selects the previous track.
LONG PRESS
In Radio mode: scan lower frequencies until released.
In Media mode: fast rewind track.
Voice command button (3)
Action
Function
SHORT PRESS
Activate voice commands.
LONG PRESS
Close the voice session immediately.
Phone button (4)
answers / closes call or shows the recent calls list.
Volume Control (5)
Action
Function
ROTATION
upwards: increases volume.
downwards: decreases volume.
SHORT PRESS
In Radio mode: activates/deactivates the Mute functions.
In Media mode: activates play/pause.
In Phone mode: activates/deactivates the microphone Mute function.
218
INTRODUCTION
RADIO MODE
The system can be controlled through the
Rotary Pad. By turning it, you can
navigate the menus, by pressing it, you
can activate/confirm the selections, and
by pushing it left you go back to the
preceding screen.
After the desired radio station has been
selected, the following information is
shown on the display fig. 194:
194
Audio
The following settings are available in the
“Audio” menu present in the Options
menu (Option button):
Bass;
Treble;
Mid;
Balance/Fade;
Volume/Speed;
Surround Sound (where provided);
AUX volume comp.;
Restore settings.
11056S0006EM
1 - control bar:
Favourites List;
Next;
Previous;
Stations List;
Tuner seek;
Frequency band.
2 - name of the radio being played and the
favourite symbol if the station is store in
the list;
3 - active frequency band logo;
4 - transmitted programme type;
5 - current station frequency;
6 - preset number (if the current station
is stored).
219
MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA MODE
Bluetooth® SOURCE
USB/iPod/AUX SUPPORT
IMPORTANT Applications used on
portable devices may be not compatible
with the Connect system.
Pairing a Bluetooth® audio device
Proceed as follows:
activate the Bluetooth® function on the
device;
press the MENU button, select the
“SETTINGS” function by turning and
pressing the Rotary Pad;
select “Infotainment”;
select the Bluetooth® device;
select "Add device";
search for the Connect system on the
Bluetooth® audio device (during the
pairing stage a screen is displayed
showing the progress of the operation);
select the device to be paired;
when requested by the audio device,
enter the PIN code shown on the system
display or confirm on the device the PIN
displayed;
if the pairing procedure is completed
successfully, a dedicated screen is
displayed;
the “Bluetooth®” can be reached also
by pressing the OPTION button in the
PHONE or MEDIA functions. The latter
can be selected by turning and pressing
the Rotary Pad in the main menu (MENU
button).
There may be two USB ports under the
air conditioner control panel, one in the
glove compartment in the central tunnel
and two (recharge only) under the air
vents behind the central tunnel.
An AUX socket is located inside the glove
compartment in the central tunnel.
NOTE The Connect system may not
support some USB keys: in this case, it
may not automatically switch from
“Radio” mode to “Media” mode. If the
device used does not play, verify its
compatibility by selecting “Media” mode:
a dedicated message will appear on the
Connect system display.
Track selection (Browse)
With MEDIAfig. 195 mode active, briefly
/
buttons to play the
press the
/
previous/next track or keep the
buttons pressed to fast
rewind/forward the track.
195
11066S0002EM
IMPORTANT If the Bluetooth® connection
between mobile phone and system is
lost, consult the mobile phone handbook.
220
IMPORTANT After using a USB
recharging socket, we recommend
disconnecting the device (smartphone),
always removing the cable from the
vehicle socket first, never from the
device. Cables left flying or connected
incorrectly could compromise correct
recharging and/or the USB socket
condition.
PHONE MODE
PHONE mode can be activated from the
main menu (MENU button) by turning and
pressing the Rotary Pad.
IMPORTANT The mobile phone audio is
transmitted through the car’s audio
system; the system automatically mutes
the system audio when the PHONE
function is used.
IMPORTANT For a list of compatible
mobile phones and supported functions,
contact Customer Service at
00 800 2532 0000 or refer to the
dedicated supplement on the eLum
website.
196
11106S0002EM
The following control bar appears on the
display fig. 196:
Dial;
Recent calls;
Favourites;
Contacts;
Text messages;
End call;
with call in progress:
Dial;
Recent calls;
Transfer to device;
Contacts;
Mute;
End call.
the “Bluetooth®” can be reached also
by pressing the OPTION button in the
PHONE or MEDIA functions. The latter
can be selected by turning and pressing
the Rotary Pad in the main menu (MENU
button).
Making a phone call
Proceed as follows:
selecting the "Recent calls" icon;
selecting the "Contacts" icon;
selecting the "Dial" icon.
Pairing a mobile phone
Proceed as follows:
activate the Bluetooth® function on the
device;
press the MENU button, select the
“SETTINGS” function by turning and
pressing the Rotary Pad;
select “Infotainment”;
select the Bluetooth® device;
select "Add device";
search for the Connect system on the
Bluetooth® audio device (during the
pairing stage a screen is displayed
showing the progress of the operation);
when requested by the audio device,
enter the PIN code shown on the system
display or confirm on the device the PIN
displayed;
when the pairing procedure is
completed successfully, a dedicated
screen is displayed;
221
MULTIMEDIA
NAVIGATION MODE
(where provided)
IMPORTANT In the interest of safety and
to reduce distractions while you are
driving, you should always plan a route
before you start driving.
197
11186S0003EM
To plan a route, do the following:
Activate the NAVIGATION mode by
selecting it in the main menu fig. 197;
Activate the "Set destination"
function;
To enter the address, select the item to
add (Country, City) on the circular keypad,
choosing the keys to compose the
desired name; proceeding with keying in
the letters, the system automatically
completes the word and on the right of
the display offers a list of options that
apply to the entered letters. You can now
either complete the word or go to the list
of suggestions by moving the Rotary Pad
222
to the right or by pointing to “OK” and
pressing the Rotary Pad.
Or
Select an address on the "Recent
destinations" list.
Or
Select an address on the "Favourite
destinations" list.
Once the desired destination has been
set, select "Start navigation" function.
The system suggests three alternatives
according to the set criteria (fastest, no
toll routes etc.); select the preferred
alternative using the Rotary Pad.
With navigation started, using the control
bar on the display, you can choose from
the following options:
Interrupt navigation: lets you interrupt
navigation;
Navigation volume: allows to set the
message volume;
Route management: lets you refine
your route choice, offering a series of
options;
Route Preview: this is used to see a
preview of the planned route;
Zoom: lets you enlarge/reduce the
map;
Map explore: lets you move within the
map.
CAR
CAR mode can be activated from the
main menu (MENU button) by turning and
pressing the Rotary Pad.
The display fig. 198 will show the
following information:
"Car Status": displays information on
the state of the car;
"Efficient drive": this lets you see some
driving style parameters;
"Use and service": lets you consult the
car's user manual.
198
11126S0666EM
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
(where provided)
The Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
applications allow you to use your
smartphone in the car safely and
intuitively.
To enable them, just connect a
compatible smartphone via the USB port
and the contents of the phone will be
automatically shown on the Connect
system display.
To check the compatibility of your
smartphone, see the indications on the
websites:
https://www.android.com/intl/it_it/auto/
and http://www.apple.com/it/ios/
carplay/.
If the smartphone is connected correctly
to the car via the USB port, the Apple
CarPlay or Android Auto icon will be
displayed in the main menu.
NOTE Interaction with the smartphone
may be needed to enable Apple
Carplay/Android Auto and some other
functions. Complete the action on your
device (smartphone) as needed.
To use Apple CarPlay, connect your
iPhone to the car using a MFI (made for
iPhone) certified USB cable. To use
Android Auto, connect your smartphone
to the car using a USB for Android phones
having appropriate features. Using
unsuitable cables may prevent correct
system operation.
Apple CarPlay App Setup
Apple CarPlay is compatible with the
iPhone 5 or more recent models, with the
iOS 7.1 operating system or later
versions.
Before using Apple CarPlay, enable Siri
from the settings on your smartphone.
To use Apple CarPlay, the smartphone
must be connected to the car with a USB
cable.
Android Auto APP Setup
Before use, download the Android Auto
application to your smartphone from
Google Play Store.
The application is compatible with
Android 5.0 (Lollipop) and later versions.
To use Android Auto, the smartphone
must be connected to the car with a USB
cable.
interaction and short press to close the
voice assistant).
The Telephone application of the
smartphone can be accessed directly
using the control on the steering wheel
.
Multimedia contents on the smartphone
can be accessed directly via “MEDIA”
mode of Connect.
Navigation
With the Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
applications, the user can choose to use
the navigation system on their
smartphone.
Exiting from the Apple CarPlay and
Android Auto apps
To end the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto
session, physically disconnect the
smartphone from the USB port.
Interaction
After the setup procedure, on connecting
your smartphone to the car's USB port,
the application will automatically run on
the Connect system.
The Rotary Pad can be used to select and
confirm the available smartphone
functions.
You can interact with the Apple CarPlay
and Android Auto voice assistants using
the control on the steering wheel (long
button to start the
press of the
223
MULTIMEDIA
SETTINGS
To access the user-programmable
functions, open the main menu by
pressing the MENU button, then select
SETTINGS by turning and pressing the
Rotary Pad.
The following items can be found in this
menu fig. 199:
Lights;
Units & Language;
Time and Date;
Safety;
Driver assistance;
Doors & Locks;
Cluster;
Infotainment;
System.
199
11126S0001EM
Lights
To access the “Lights” function, select it
by turning the Rotary Pad and press the
Rotary Pad to activate. The following
224
settings can be modified when this mode
is selected:
Headlight sensor;
Follow me;
Cornering lights;
Flash lights when locking;
Daytime running lights;
Courtesy lights;
Interior lights;
Automatic High Beam;
Restore settings.
Units & Language
To access the “Units and languages”
function, select it by turning the Rotary
Pad and press the Rotary Pad to activate.
The following settings can be modified
when this mode is selected:
Units;
Language;
Restore settings.
Time and Date
To access the “Time & date” function,
select it by turning the Rotary Pad and
press the Rotary Pad to activate. The
following settings can be modified when
this mode is selected:
Sync with GPS Time;
Set time;
Time format;
Set Date;
Restore settings.
Safety
To access the “Safety” function, select it
by turning the Rotary Pad and press the
Rotary Pad to activate.
The following settings can be modified
when this mode is selected:
Speed Limiter
This lets you activate/deactivate the
function warning that you have exceeded
the set speed.
Speed Limiter - Set Speed
Lets you set the speed limit value. By
turning the Rotary Pad, the speed
increases by 5 mph (5 km/h), on rotation,
from a minimum of 20 mph (30 km/h) to a
maximum of 110 mph (180 km/h).
Forward Collision Warning
Allows you to select the intervention
readiness for the anti-collision system.
The options available are:
"Status": lets you activate/deactivate
the system (where provided);
"Mode": used to set the following
operating modes: Warning-brake,
warning, off (where provided);
"Sensitivity": allows you to select the
intervention readiness for the system
according to the distance of the obstacle
(near, average, far).
Lane Departure Warning
This function can be used to select the
"readiness" of the Lane Departure
system to intervene. The options
available are:
“Sensitivity": allows you to select the
intervention readiness for the system
(high, low).
Blind Spot Monitoring
This function can be used to set the
warning linked to the presence of objects
in the door mirror blind spot.
The options available are:
"Sound & Display": the system warns
the driver that an obstacle is present
through acoustic (via the speakers in the
car) and visual (on the instrument panel)
warnings;
"Sound Only": the system warns the
driver that an obstacle is present through
acoustic indications only, via the
speakers in the car;
"Off": system disengaged.
Passenger's airbag
(where provided)
Lets you activate/deactivate the front
passenger airbag function. When the
function is accessed, the system will
detect the activation/deactivation status
of the airbags and confirm change of
status. Press the Rotary Pad to continue.
The air bag status is visible through the
LED next to the status icon on the
dashboard.
Passenger protection activated: the ON
LED switches on with a steady light.
Passenger protection deactivated: the
OFF LED switches on with a steady light.
Seat belt reminder
This function appears only if the seat belt
reminder was deactivated and allows to
reactivate it.
Driver assistance
To access the “Driver assistance”
function, select it by turning the Rotary
Pad and press the Rotary Pad to activate.
This function can be used to carry out the
following adjustments:
ParkSense
This function can be used to select the
type of warning provided by the
ParkSense system.
The options available are:
“Mode”: the following options are
available in this function: “Sound”, the
system notifies the driver of the
presence of an obstacle by means of
auditory signals only, by means of the
speakers in the car or “Sound and
Display”, the system notifies the driver of
the presence of an obstacle by means of
auditory signals (by means of the
speakers in the vehicle) and visual
signals, on the instrument panel display.
"Audio": allows to select the volume of
the acoustic warnings provided by the
ParkSense system, the available options
are: "High", "Medium" or "Low".
Rear view camera
(where provided)
This function can be used to carry out the
following adjustments:
"View": lets you activate viewing the
video camera on the display;
"Cam Delay": allows you to delay
switching off the camera by a few
seconds when reverse gear is
disengaged.
“Camera Guidelines”: Allows you to
enable the dynamic guidelines on the
display to indicate the vehicle’s path.
Automatic parking brake
This function allows you to
activate/deactivate the automatic
parking brake engagement upon
switching off the engine.
Brake service
(where provided)
This function permits the activation of
the procedure to carry out braking
system maintenance.
Easy Entry
(where provided)
This function can be used to
activate/deactivate front seat retraction
(Easy Entry function). The default setting
is “Off”.
Automatic mirror closing
(where provided)
This function activates/deactivates
225
MULTIMEDIA
automatic folding of the mirrors when the
doors are locked/unlocked. The default
setting is “Off”.
Restore settings
This function allows you to delete the
settings from this menu.
Access the functions and select the
setting by turning and pressing the
Rotary Pad.
Doors & Locks
To access the “Doors & Locks” function,
select it by turning the Rotary Pad and
press the control to activate it. The
following settings can be modified when
this mode is selected:
Door lock in motion;
Unlock all doors on exit;
Passive Entry (where provided);
Door Unlock On Entry (where
provided);
Horn w/Remote Start (for
versions/markets where provided);
Sound Horn with Lock (where
provided);
Auto Relock (where provided);
Electric tailgate (where provided);
Automatic tailgate opening (where
provided);
Restore settings.
226
Control panel
To access the “Control panel” function,
select it by turning the Rotary Pad and
press the Rotary Pad to activate. The
following settings can be modified when
this mode is selected:
Warning buzzer volume;
Trip B;
Show telephone info;
Show audio info;
Show Navi info;
Restore settings.
Infotainment
To access the “Infotainment” function,
select it by turning the Rotary Pad and
press the Rotary Pad to activate. The
following settings can be modified when
this mode is selected:
Screen Off;
Splitscreen (where provided);
Audio;
Bluetooth;
Radio;
Media;
Phone;
Navigation (where provided);
Apps.
System
To access the “System” function, select it
by turning the Rotary Pad and press the
Rotary Pad to activate. The following
settings can be modified when this mode
is selected:
Automatic activation;
Cam Delay;
Update Software;
Map update;
Clear personal data;
Restore settings.
IMPORTANT For further information
about the map update procedure, refer to
the Connect system supplement on the
uLum website.
MAP UPDATE
To ensure optimal performance, the
navigation system must be updated
periodically.
For this, the Mopar Map Care service
offers a new map update every three
months.
The updates can be downloaded from the
maps.mopar.eu website and installed
directly on the Connect system. All
updates are free of charge for 3 years
from the start of the warranty on the car.
The navigation system can also be
updated at the Alfa Romeo Dealership.
NOTE The dealer may charge for
updating the navigation system.
VOICE COMMANDS
IMPORTANT For languages not
supported by the system, voice
commands are not available.
To use the voice commands, press the
button on the steering wheel controls
and say the function you want to activate
aloud.
The following lists give the main word for
each command.
Radio functions
button lets you activate the
The
following functions:
Tune into the station < XXX>
Tune to the frequency < XXX>
Add to favourites
Show Available Stations
Show Favourite Stations
FM
AM
DAB (where provided)
SiriusXM (where provided)
Media function
button lets you activate the
The
following functions:
Display Album
Play Album
Display Artist
Play Artist
Display Composer
Play Composer
Display Genre
Play Genre
Display Playlist
Play Playlist
Play song
Play All
Display all the albums
Display all the artists
Display all the composers
Display all the genres
Display all the playlists
View all songs
Activate shuffle
Deactivate shuffle
Change Source to Aux
Change Source to USB 1
Change Source to USB 2
Change Source to Bluetooth
NOTE These controls are valid on devices
connected to the system via USB ports
and not through the Bluetooth® system.
Navigation functions
(where provided)
The
button lets you activate the
following functions:
Navigate to < address>
Favourites
Set 2D map
Set detailed 3D map
Set overhead view
Route preview
Start navigation
Stop navigation
Repeat instructions
Show map
Find the nearest < point of interest>
Telephone function
The
button lets you activate the
following functions:
Dial < XXX>
Call < XXX>
Redial
Show contacts
Show all calls
Show missed calls
Search
227
MULTIMEDIA
OFFICIAL TYPE APPROVALS
All radio equipment supplied with the
vehicle complies with the 2014/53/EU
directive.
For further information visit the
www.mopar.eu/owner or
http://aftersales.fiat.com/elum/
websites.
228
ALFA CONNECT
PRIVACY MODE
(where provided)
Privacy mode lets you disable the “Find
car”, “Notify Area” and “Notify Speed”
services for a certain time.
These services let you keep your vehicle
under control at all times and receive
assistance in the event of accident, theft
or breakdown. These services may be
present if the Alfa Connect Device is
installed on your vehicle, the services are
available in your country (list available on
the www.alfaromeoconnect.eu website)
and you requested activation by
following the instructions received at the
email address given when your vehicle
was handed over to you.
Download the Alfa Connect App or
access the www.alfaromeoconnect.eu
portal to use the connected services. You
can find all the details about the services
on the www.alfaromeoconnect.eu portal.
IMPORTANT Vehicle position tracing
remains active for the assistance
services, where provided, in the event of
accident or vehicle theft, but is not visible
to the customer.
PRIVACY MODE activation procedure
Proceed as follows:
take note of the total odometer
reading;
make sure that the instrument panel is
off;
send the following text message to
+393424112613: “PRIVACY
” (e.g.: PRIVACY
ZAR00000ABC001). You can find the
chassis number in the registration
document;
before starting the engine, wait to
receive the text message confirming that
Privacy mode has been activated and
indicating when it expires.
When you have received the
confirmation, you can start your trip in
the knowledge that the vehicle will not be
traced until the indicated expiry time. If it
expires while you are still travelling,
Privacy mode will be extended until you
turn off the engine (instrument panel off).
If you receive a text message indicating
that your request was not successful, you
must be aware that the vehicle will
continue to be visible to the registered
customer. If you have any problems
during activation, consult the FAQ on the
www.alfaromeoconnect.eu portal,
contact the Alfa Romeo Service Network
or contact Customer Care.
229
IMPORTANT INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS
WARNING
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
In the event of an accident or sharp braking, any object placed on the curtain may be projected into the passenger compartment, and risk hurting
the occupants.
INTERIOR FITTINGS
Do not travel with the storage compartment open: it may injure the front seat occupants in the event of an accident.
POWER SUPPLY
Modifications or repairs to the supply system that are not carried out correctly or do not take the system technical specifications into account can
cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS
The catalytic converter and particulate filter (DPF) reach very high temperatures during operation. Therefore do not park the vehicle on flammable
materials (e.g. grass, dry leaves, pine needles, etc.): fire hazard.
IMPORTANT
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
To avoid damaging the blind, do not place heavy objects on it.
It’s in the heart of your engine.
Ask your mechanic for
Your car has chosen PETRONAS Selenia
The engine of your car was made with PETRONAS Selenia, the range
of engine oils that satisfies the most advanced international specifications.
Subject to specific tests and boasting outstanding technical characteristics,
PETRONAS Selenia is a lubricant designed to equip your engine
with reliable, winning performance standards”
The quality of PETRONAS Selenia is divided into a range of technologically advanced products:
SELENIA WR FORWARD 0W-30/0W-20
SELENIA MULTIPOWER C3
Fully synthetic, latest generation lubricant specifically formulated for EURO 6
diesel engines. Its fully synthetic formula and 0W-30 viscosity grade guarantee excellent performance in terms of fuel economy for diesel engines
equipped with high efficiency turbo-charger. PETRONAS Selenia Forward
also features excellent resistance to oxidation, thus maintaining its technical
characteristics and promoting maximum engine performance throughout
the entire oil-change interval.
Is a high performance synthetic lubricant designed for petrol and diesel
engines requiring products able to reduce ash deposits to the absolute
minimum. It provides increased protection against wear and tear
and has excellent fuel economy characteristics. It protects the particle
filter (DPF) in diesel engines.
SELENIA DIGITEK P.E. 0W-30
Is the fully synthetic lubricant created for the most modern petrol engines.
Its special viscosity grade and its specific formulation enhance the fuel
economy features and, consequently the reduction of CO2 emissions.
Especially created for TwinAir two-cylinder engines, it ensures maximum
engine protection even under high mechanical stress due to mainly city use.
SELENIA SPORT POWER
Is a fully synthetic lubricant designed to enhance the sporting
characteristics of direct injection petrol engines (GDI).
It maximizes sporting performances while maintaining complete engine
protection, even under the most severe conditions of use.
The PETRONAS Selenia range is completed with Selenia StAR Pure Energy, Selenia StAR,
Selenia WR Pure Energy, Selenia Sport, and Selenia Racing.
For further information concerning PETRONAS Selenia products, consult the website: www.pli-petronas.com
NOTES
Carrying children safely
INDEX
ABS (system).
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Cruise Control . . . . . . . .
Active safety systems. . . . . . . .
Additive for diesel emissions
AdBlue (UREA) . . . . . . . . . .
AFS function . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . .
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag (SRS supplementary
restraint system) . . . . . . . . .
Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alfa Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alfa DNA system . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic dual-zone climate
control system . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic high beam headlights .
Automatic transmission. . . . . . .
Automatic transmission gear lever
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery recharging . . . . . . .
Bodywork (cleaning and
maintenance) . . . . . . . .
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes
Brake fluid level . . . . . . .
Broken-down vehicle towing .
BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring).
. . .72
. .120
. . .72
. .136
. . .28
. .103
. .107
.
.
.
.
.103
. .15
.228
.116
. . .33
. . .29
. .114
. .165
. . . . .182
. . . . .184
. . . . .189
. . . . . .38
. . . . .182
. . . . .166
. . . . . .76
. . . . .
Changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking levels . . . . . . . . . . .
Child protection systems . . . . .
Child safety device. . . . . . . . .
Climate control system . . . . . .
CO2 emissions . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel and on-board
instruments . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls on steering wheel
summary table . . . . . . . . .
Tunnel control summary table
Cruise Control. . . . . . . . . . . .
Cybersecurity devices . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .91
.146
.177
. .91
. .17
. .33
.209
. . . .44
. . .214
.
.
.
.
.217
.214
.119
. . .3
. . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dipped headlights . . . . . . . . . . .
Dipped
. . . headlights
. . . . . . . (changing
. . . . . . a. bulb)
. . . .
Direction indicators (changing a
bulb) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving assistance systems . . . . .
DTC (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dusk sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .27
.199
. .27
.149
Daytime running lights (DRL)
Electric parking brake.
.
.
.
.
.150
. .46
. .15
. .76
. .72
. .27
. . . . . . . . .111
Electric steering wheel heating . . . . .24
Electric sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant level . . . . . . .
Engine compartment . . . . . . . .
Engine Immobilizer (system) . . . .
Engine oil
Consumption . . . . . . . . . . .
Level check . . . . . . . . . . . .
ESC (Electronic Stability Control)
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External lights . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids and lubricants
.
.
.
.
.
. .181
. .181
. . .72
. . .26
. . . . . . . . .
Fog lights (bulb replacement) . . . .
Forward
. . . . Collision
. . . . . .Warning
. . . . . (system)
. . . . . .
Front ceiling light. . . . . . . . . . . .
Front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front light cluster with main
beam/dipped beam halogen
headlights (bulb replacement) . .
Front light cluster with main
beam/dipped beam Xenon gas
discharge headlights (bulb
replacement). . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats (electric adjustment) . .
Front seats (manual adjustments). .
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel cut-off system . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses (replacement) . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard warning lights .
. .35
.193
.182
.177
. .14
.205
.150
. .78
. .31
. .27
.149
.150
. .20
. .19
.209
.165
.151
.151
. . . . . . . . .146
INDEX
Emergency braking . . . . . . .
HDC (system) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight alignment adjustment
Headlight alignment corrector. .
HSA (Hill Start Assist) system . .
Identification data . . . . . . .
Ignition device . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . .
ISOFIX child restraint system
(installation) . . . . . . . . .
Jump starting.
Keys
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.146
. .74
. .23
. .30
. .30
. .73
. . . . .192
. . . . . .13
. . . . . .31
. . . . . .95
. . . . . . . . . . .163 ,164
Electronic key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Lane Change .
. . . . . . . . . . .
Lane Departure Warning System
Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . .
Light bulbs
Types of bulbs . . . . . . . . . .
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage compartment tailgate .
. . . .29
. . .129
. . .187
. . .147
. . . .26
. . . .39
Main beam headlights
. . . . . . . . . .28
Main beam headlights (changing a
bulb) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Occupant protection systems.
Paintwork (cleaning and
. . . . .86
maintenance) . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Park Sensors system . . . . . . . . . .127
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Parking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Passive Entry (system) . . . . . . .
PBA (Panic Brake Assist) system .
Performance (top speed) . . . . . .
Power Lock (device) . . . . . . . . .
Pre-tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load limiters . . . . . . . . . . .
Prescriptions for handling the car
at the end of its life . . . . . . . .
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RCP system . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Back-up Camera / Dynamic
Gridlines . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . .
Rear window wiper/washer . . .
Reconfigurable TFT display . . .
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refuelling procedure . . . . . . .
Refuelling the vehicle . . . . . . .
Replacing an external bulb . . . .
Rims and tyres . . . . . . . . . . .
Rims and tyres provided . . . . .
Run Flat Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.111
. .16
. .73
.208
. .17
. .89
. .89
. .210
. . . .32
. . . .78
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Saving fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SBA (Seat Belt Alert) system . . .
Scheduled servicing . . . . . . . . .
Scheduled servicing plan (2.2 JTD
diesel engine versions) . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.130
. .21
. .24
. .32
. .46
.202
.131
.131
.149
.195
.196
.163
. .136
. . .88
. .170
. .174
Screen wiper/washer . . . . . .
Smart washing function . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service schedule (2.0 T4 MAir
petrol engine versions). . . .
Servicing procedures . . . . . .
Side bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed Limiter . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS (supplementary restraint
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start & Stop Evo . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine. . . . . . . .
Starting with flat key battery .
Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel controls . . . . .
Suggestions for driving . . . . .
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.171
.185
.107
. .27
.188
.118
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.103
.117
.110
. .13
. .13
. .23
.217
.136
. . .5
. . .
TFT Display (3.5”) . . . . . . . . . .
TFT Display (7”). . . . . . . . . . . .
The keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Repair Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Topping up AdBlue® (UREA) diesel
emissions additive . . . . . . . .
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
. .73
. .44
. .45
. .12
.160
TC (Traction Control) system
.31
.32
.86
.19
. .132
. .166
Towing trailers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Tyres (inflation pressure) . . . . . . . .197
Use of the Owner Handbook
Vehicle changes/alterations
. . . . . . .4
. . . . . . .5
Vehicle identification number . . . . .192
Warning lights and messages .
. . . . .51
Washer fluid for
windscreen/headlights.
Weights . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels and tyres . . . . . .
Window bag . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wiper . . . . .
Replacing wiper blades
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.182
.200
.188
.107
. .31
.186
}͞ţţţƖƖ }͞ } Ɠ͞
}͞}ţ ǘƖǖǕǕǙǕ}Ɩ Φ }ơ
Printno.603.93.295-ǖǖ/2018-ǖEdition
ALFA ROMEO GENUINE SPARE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
PERFECT FOR YOUR VEHICLE, RIGHT DOWN TO THE SMALLEST DETAIL
The Alfa Romeo Genuine Spare Parts and Accessories follow the rigid component engineering and manufacturing specifications
used in the assembly line to meet the technical specifications of your new Alfa Romeo and to enhance its style and performance. They
undergo strict approval tests and quality controls to ensure they comply with safety and environmental standards.
All of the components on your new Alfa Romeo, from the smallest bulb to the most complex mechanical, electrical and electronic
systems, are designed to work in harmony and guarantee you a comfortable and safe drive, in full respect for the environment. The
Genuine Accessories fully enhance the style of your new vehicle.
Entrust the experience and quality of Alfa Romeo Dealerships to find the full range of Alfa Romeo Genuine Spare Parts and
Accessories.
Find your nearest Dealership on www.alfaromeo.com
ENGLISH